JP6900978B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which special symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed in a variable manner to notify the result of determining whether or not the game is successful.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-153640

In the pachinko machine or the like of this kind, there has been a failure to feel a sense of discomfort to the player at the time of fluctuations stop.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine to reduce causing a feeling of differences sum to the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a main control means for executing game control, a sub-control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control. The means are a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, a dynamic display mode determination means that determines a dynamic display mode of identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display mode determination thereof. The subordinate control means has the progress notification means for notifying the passage of the set period set in the dynamic display mode determined by the means, and the slave control means has the motion determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information in the target display mode and the progress notification means notifying the elapse of the set period, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined definite display mode. It has a definite stop means for causing the definite stop means and an auxiliary information display control means for dynamically displaying the auxiliary identification information in a display mode different from the identification information. The auxiliary information display control means has a stop notification means for notifying the auxiliary information display control means that the stop display has been performed in the definite display mode, and the auxiliary information display control means stops the identification information in the definite display mode by the stop notification means. When notified that the information has been displayed, the auxiliary identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined auxiliary information confirmation display mode, and the identification information is visually recognized by the player during the period of dynamic display. is the period which can not set, the auxiliary identifying information is a period no longer visible from Yu skill who are prevented from being set.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for executing the control of the game, the sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means are discriminating conditions. It was determined by the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the above, the dynamic display mode determining means that determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display mode determining means. It has a progress notification means for notifying the passage of a set period set in the dynamic display mode, and the slave control means is the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. A display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information, and a definite stop means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a predetermined definite display mode based on the notification of the elapse of the set period by the progress notification means. The subordinate control means has an auxiliary information display control means for dynamically displaying auxiliary identification information in a display mode different from the identification information, and the slave control means stops the identification information in the final display mode by the fixed stop means. The auxiliary information display control means has a stop notification means for notifying the auxiliary information display control means that the information has been displayed, and the auxiliary information display control means has stopped and displayed the identification information in the definite display mode by the stop notification means. When notified, the auxiliary identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined auxiliary information confirmation display mode, and the identification information is set to a period during which the player cannot see it during the period of dynamic display. is enabled, the auxiliary identification information is a period that can not be visually recognized from Yu skill who are prevented from being set.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen in the first embodiment. .. (A) to (i) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the flow of sway fluctuation when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first embodiment. (A) to (i) are schematic diagrams which show in detail the flow about the shaking fluctuation at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timing chart of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation display data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the disconnection confirmation command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control procedure in the first embodiment, and (b) is the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot confirmation command reception process executed by. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the actual display screen in the second embodiment. .. (A) to (i) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the flow of sway fluctuation when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timing chart of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation display data table in the 2nd Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in the 2nd Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th confirmation command transmission processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the disconnection confirmation command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control procedure in the second embodiment, and (b) is the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot confirmation command reception process executed by. (A) is a flowchart showing the disengagement fourth confirmation command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control procedure in the second embodiment, and (b) is in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process executed by MPU of. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation display data table in the 3rd Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in the 3rd Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the disengagement fourth confirmation command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control procedure in the third embodiment, and (b) is in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process executed by MPU of. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the disconnection confirmation command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control procedure in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot confirmation command reception process executed by. It is a flowchart which showed the display command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the disengagement fourth confirmation command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control procedure in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process executed by MPU of. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the display loss confirmation command reception process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the MPU in the display control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot confirmation command reception process for display executed by. (A) is a flowchart showing the display error notification 1 command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the MPU in the display control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error notification 3 command reception processing for display executed by. It is a figure which showed the timing chart of the fluctuation pattern of the 3rd symbol in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation display data table in 5th Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in 5th Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the symbol determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 6th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the background of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when discharging the ball stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ash plate 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guidance passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of special symbols, "Big hit A" and "Big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to these big hit types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, the winning or not judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the first entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of the reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). Further, in "big hit A" and "big hit B", in addition to the above-mentioned added value, the added value after the end of the big hit is different from each other. Specifically, "big hit A" is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit until the next big hit of the special symbol, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is further increased, and "big hit B" is the big hit. From the end to the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time-saving state" (normal symbol time-saving medium) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. .. Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. As described above, the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment is a jackpot. Regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common, and the period of "normal symbol time reduction state" is changed according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened" depending on the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entry port 64, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed by hitting the normal symbol of. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol high probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are set, but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, the "normal symbol time saving state" is reached. May be configured to be.

In addition, when the special symbol becomes a jackpot and shifts from the "normal state of the normal symbol" to the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the lottery of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (book) after the jackpot of the special symbol ends. In the embodiment, it is continued until the end (100 times). On the other hand, after the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, if the jackpot of a new special symbol is not reached by the time the lottery of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times is completed, the process returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols composed of numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by adding a number from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol composed of a wooden box.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper 3/4 is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/4 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. Of these, the sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entry port 64.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry times is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the sub-display area Ds. In the sub-display area Ds, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is displayed. Indicates that is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, it is a figure which showed the detailed flow of the fluctuation about the shaking fluctuation performed at the time of stopping of the 3rd symbol displayed in the main display area Dm. It is a figure which showed the shaking fluctuation which shows that the 3rd symbol is temporarily stopped before the stop display when the 3rd symbol is variable display (dynamic display). After the predetermined variation mode is displayed, the sway variation indicating that the temporary stop is performed until the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, which will be described later, is received is displayed.

5 (a) to 5 (i) show display images for each 20 ms set in the variable display data table stored in the data table storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, which will be described later. .. 5 (a), (e), and (i) show the shaking center where the special symbol is displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm. Further, FIGS. 5 (b) and 5 (d) show the middle of the shaking rise in which the third symbol is displayed at the intermediate position from the center position L1 of the main display area Dm to the highest rising position of the shaking fluctuation. FIG. 5C shows the swaying rise displayed at the highest rising position where the third symbol is displayed as the most rising in the swaying fluctuation. FIGS. 5 (f) and 5 (h) show the middle of the shaking and lowering in which the special symbol is displayed at the intermediate position between the central position L1 of the main display area Dm and the lowest lowering position displayed in the shaking fluctuation. There is. FIG. 5 (g) is a diagram showing the swaying and descending displayed at the lowest descending position where the third symbol is displayed as the most descending in the swaying fluctuation.

FIG. 5A is a diagram corresponding to the drawing content (display content) specified by the address 02E7H of the variable display data table. Similarly, FIG. 5 (b) is an address 02E8H, FIG. 5 (c) is an address 02E9H, FIG. 5 (d) is an address 02EAH, FIG. 5 (e) is an address 02EBH, and FIG. 5 (f) is an address. 02ECH, FIG. 5 (g) is an address 02EDH, FIG. 5 (h) is an address 02EEH, and FIG. 5 (i) is a diagram showing drawing contents corresponding to the address 02EFH. The details will be described later, but by displaying the drawing contents of FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (i) in order of 20 ms each, one cycle of the shaking fluctuation displayed by shaking the third symbol is displayed. It has become.

Further, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing in detail one shaking of the third symbol. 6 (a) to 6 (i) are diagrams showing the shaking of the special symbol in the shaking fluctuation set in the fluctuation display data table in the same manner as in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (i). As shown in FIG. 6, the display is moved up and down around the center position L1 of the main display area Dm, and is swayed up and down to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize), a special symbol is drawn by using it as a trigger, and then the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, a variation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed according to the variation display of the first symbol display device 37. Fluctuation display is performed.

When the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation display of the third symbol, the high-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol is first started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). After that, the display is switched to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further, the display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is output from the main control device 110 after the temporary stop display in which the main symbols (third symbol) having the same number are aligned is performed and the shaking fluctuation is executed. The variable effect ends based on the receipt of the jackpot confirmation command, and then the jackpot effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a temporary stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) having the same number are not aligned, and a shaking fluctuation display indicating that the temporary stop is performed is executed. Then, if the variation effect is completed based on the reception of the deviation confirmation command output from the main control device 110 and there is a pending start prize, the next special symbol is drawn and the next variation is performed. The production starts.

With reference to FIG. 7, as an example of the variation pattern of the third symbol, the flow of the display mode of the deviation variation pattern displayed when the lottery result is deviation will be described. FIG. 7 is a timing chart showing the flow of the deviation variation pattern for displaying the third symbol in a variable manner. The details will be described later, but when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command output by the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command is output to the display control device 114, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 A display data table in which the display contents indicated by the display variation pattern command received by the command are stored is set, and the variation display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 7, when the variation display of the third symbol is started, the left symbol of the third symbol is the main symbol display area in Z1t after a predetermined time (time set to the preset variation pattern). Temporary stop is displayed at the center position L1 of Dm, and shaking fluctuation is displayed. Next, in Z3t, the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center position L1 of the main symbol display area Dm, and the shaking fluctuation is displayed. After that, in Z2t, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center position L1 of the main symbol display area Dm, and the shaking fluctuation is displayed. After that, the third symbol (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) is repeatedly displayed with fluctuations. The sway fluctuation is executed in a series of flows as shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (i), and after being displayed at the sway center through the display in the middle of the sway descent as shown in FIG. 5 (h), the fluctuation time. During the 200 ms until the end of, the sway fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the display of the sway center, and when the display deviation confirmation command is received at the end of the fluctuation time, the confirmation stop display process is executed as it is. Here, the processing of the fixed stop display will be described in detail later, but the same symbol as the third symbol displayed by the shaking fluctuation is the same as the shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)), and the main display area Dm. The third symbol is displayed at the center position L1 of the above. On the other hand, if the display deviation confirmation command is not received, the shaking fluctuation is restarted again, and when the display deviation confirmation command is received, the shaking fluctuation is confirmed and stopped and displayed. In this case as well, similarly to the above, the symbol is switched to the same symbol as that displayed at the shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)), and the symbol is stopped and displayed as the final symbol of the third symbol.

In the normal state, at the end of the fluctuation time, the display deviation confirmation command is received, so that the shaking fluctuation is executed, and after the shaking fluctuation to a series of shaking centers is performed, the shaking center (swing center ( While the display of FIG. 5 (i) is displayed, the stop display is performed by switching and displaying the third symbol similar to the shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)) as a definite symbol. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (i) from the state of the shaking fluctuation, the third shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)) is the timing at which the shaking fluctuation of one cycle is completed. A similar third symbol of the symbol displayed at the sway center (FIG. 5 (i)) that can be switched from the state in which the symbol is variably displayed by natural sway fluctuation at the center position L1 of the main symbol display area Dm to the final display. It is possible to confirm and stop by switching and displaying in the display mode of. Therefore, it is possible to switch from the state in which the shaking center is displayed to the display mode of the same third symbol after the third symbol is displayed in the middle of the shaking and descending, which is a series of shaking fluctuations (one cycle), and the fixed stop display can be performed. , The end of the shaking fluctuation and the symbol to be confirmed and displayed can be matched and stopped without discomfort. In addition, the timing of the display control device 114 and the timing of the main control device 110 are different from each other, and the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command is issued earlier than the end time of the fluctuation time measured by the display control device 114. Even when it is received, if it is within the range of 200 ms, the third symbol can be stopped and displayed with a constant display as usual.

The third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is a symbol that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display device 37, and the first symbol is stopped from changing. According to the timing, the third symbol is also fluctuated and stopped based on the deviation confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command output from the main control device 110. The first symbol is directly controlled by the main control device 110 for variable display, while the third symbol is controlled by the display control device 114 based on various control signals output from the main control device 110. The main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) are configured for one-way communication in which a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the main control device 110 indicates in what state the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, whether it is a display of the shaking center during shaking fluctuation or a display of shaking down). Etc.) cannot be determined, and when the end time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is reached due to the timed time managed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a missed confirmation command that unilaterally instructs the stop of the third symbol or The jackpot confirmation command is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the disconnection confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command from the main control device 110, the display control device 114 unilaterally instructs the display control device 114 to stop the third symbol. Output the jackpot confirmation command. Therefore, when the third symbol is swaying and fluctuating, if a display deviation confirmation command or a display jackpot confirmation command is received in the swaying / descending display, the swaying center is displayed without going through the swaying / descending intermediate. The command is stopped and confirmed. In such a case, the same display as the shaking center is suddenly displayed without passing through the display in the middle of the shaking and descending, so that the stop display of the symbol becomes unstable and difficult to see.

However, in the present embodiment, 200 ms before the end of the fluctuation time, the sway fluctuation is displayed in a series of flows up to the sway center (FIG. 5 (i)), and then the sway center is displayed for 200 ms. It was configured to be maintained (stop display). With this configuration, when a display loss confirmation command or a display jackpot confirmation command, which would normally be received at the end of the fluctuation time, is received, it can be stopped and displayed as it is at the position of the shaking center. , The fluctuation of the third symbol can be neatly stopped and displayed at the same position of the shaking fluctuation (display of the shaking center after a series of shaking fluctuations) every time. Therefore, the sway fluctuation is displayed as a series of sway fluctuations each time, and although it actually stops at the position of the sway center for 200 ms, it is an extremely short time from the player's point of view, so a series of sways. It can be made to appear as if it is stopped and displayed as it is after the fluctuation. Therefore, the third symbol can be stopped cleanly every time after a series of shaking fluctuations. As a result, it is possible to make the player look as if the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the same timing each time, and the player can see the variable display of the third symbol without feeling uncomfortable.

Further, it is preferable that the third symbol is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the timing when the first symbol is stopped, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed for the purpose of production during the fluctuation time, it is a temporary stop. By fluctuating the shaking shown, the player is notified that the fluctuation time is in progress and that the stop is temporary. Here, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 200 ms just before the end of the fluctuation time, but 200 ms is extremely short from the viewpoint of the player, and is actually stopped and displayed. If the display deviation confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command is not received at the end of the fluctuation time, it is configured to swing and fluctuate again. Even if the stop display is displayed for a while, it does not appear to the player as if only the third symbol was stopped without synchronizing with the first symbol, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. Further, even if the reception of the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command is delayed due to some problem, the shaking fluctuation is restarted, so that it is possible to prevent the problem that only the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, as for the series of flow of the shaking fluctuation, 20 ms each of FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (i) is displayed. The series of flow of the sway fluctuation is 160 ms, where the required time is from the display of the sway center shown in FIG. 5 (a) to the start of the display of the sway center shown in FIG. 5 (i). By setting the stop display time on the display of the shaking center in the present embodiment to 200 ms, it is set to be longer than the required time for the shaking fluctuation and shorter than the shaking fluctuation for two cycles. It is possible to easily set the shaking fluctuation within the fluctuation time to be stopped and displayed for 200 ms at the shaking center at the time when the series of shaking fluctuations is completed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from appearing to be stopped because the pause time (for 200 ms) becomes too long.

In the present embodiment, the 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation time is stopped and displayed on the shaking center display, but the remaining 100 ms to 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation time is stopped and displayed at the shaking center. It may be configured to stop and display up to 100 ms after the end of the fluctuation time. With this configuration, there is a discrepancy between the fluctuation time measured by the display control device 114 and the fluctuation time measured by the main control device 110, and the confirmation command is issued after the fluctuation time measured by the display control device 114 ends. Even when the output is output from the main control device 110, if it is within 100 ms, it is before the shaking fluctuation is restarted, so that the fluctuation can be stopped (fixed stop) while the shaking center is displayed. Further, even in that case, since the paused time is within 200 ms, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the fluctuation has stopped before the end of the fluctuation time, and it is synchronized with the fluctuation stop of the first symbol. It can be made to appear as if it has stopped fluctuating.

The jackpot production is divided into three periods: a period in which the round production is performed and a period in which the ending production is performed. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and also notifies the player of the game value (normal symbol time reduction period) given to the player after the jackpot ends (displays the time reduction period). Or, it is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery of the reserved special symbol (displaying the final effect). In addition, in the ending production, notifying the player of the game value (the time saving period of the normal symbol) is called "time saving period display", and the lottery result becomes a big hit in the reserved special symbol lottery. Notifying the player of this is called "confirmed effect display".

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is operated for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64, and the number of times the ball passes through the second ball opening 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (a jackpot of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 5 times (5 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 23). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches a maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 23).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be big hits different in this way, the probability of big hits is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random number values "7,107,282" are the special symbols for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106," 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is set. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" or "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 23) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

In the variation pattern table, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 23).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 23) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a counter 203e and another storage area 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 16).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 16 and S405 in FIG. 18). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 19).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held M in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S703: No in FIG. 20).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110 and it is determined to be a jackpot B of the special symbol, a value corresponding to the jackpot (this). In the embodiment, 100) is set. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit B is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving medium counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 16). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 16).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 19).

When the special symbol lottery (win / fail determination) is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Is compared with the 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and when the values match each other, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

Therefore, the MPU 201 determines whether the value is correct or not by comparing the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the execution area with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Therefore, if no matching value is found, the processing will take a long time. In addition, when a matching value is not found and the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment) is out of order, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the stop type selection table as a process of determining the stop type at the time of the omission. Since the process of comparing with the random value is performed, it takes more time for the process. More specifically, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is a random value that becomes a "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the same reach. After the occurrence, a process is performed in which the final stop symbol is compared with a random value having a "reach other than the front-back deviation" that stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and a random value having a "complete deviation" that does not cause a reach.

Further, the MPU 201 provided in the main control device 110 usually uses an 8-bit MPU in order to facilitate the test of the pachinko machine 10, but the 8-bit MPU is used to generate 2 bytes. It takes a lot of processing time to compare the values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning of the ball into the first ball entry port 64 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Specifically, the first ball entry switch (not shown) provided corresponding to the first ball entry port 64 is turned off in the timer interrupt process of 1 (the first timer interrupt process). Is detected, the subsequent timer interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) detects that the first ball entry switch is on, and the subsequent timer interrupt process (third timer interrupt process). When it is detected that the first ball entry switch is on, it is detected that the ball has been won in the first ball entry port 64. This makes it possible to prevent erroneous detection of winning a ball when the output of the first ball opening switch fluctuates due to the influence of noise. In this way, the winning of the ball to the first ball opening 64 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when the winning of the ball to the first ball opening 64 is detected by a certain timer interrupt process, the next In the timer interrupt process of, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is never detected. Therefore, among the timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed, the start prize is not detected in both of the two timer interrupt processes in which the execution order is continuous.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a, a fluctuation start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, and a fluctuation pattern storage area 223d.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223a (see S1408 in FIG. 26). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223b is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 26), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 28). When the variation start flag 223b is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223c is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 26), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 28). When the stop type selection flag 223c is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set as it is.

The RAM 223 has an other storage area 223z, such as a command storage area for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 26) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 29) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 29) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 14) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 31B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 29).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the display control device 114 turns on the power, the image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 will be described. It is explanatory drawing to be done.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly in the middle.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on variation image using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, the numbers "0" to "9" are resident as the main symbols. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a demo effect. A display data table corresponding to is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol of the main symbol composed of the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the variable display effect and one display data table corresponding to the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the third address ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 12) of the display data table is the third. "LOOP" information for instructing to repeatedly execute the shaking fluctuation of the symbol is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "LOOP" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described. In this way, in the variable display data table, the variable time up to the address 02E6H is set to be the preset variable time, and when the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command is received there, the symbol is shown in FIG. As shown in (a) or FIG. 5 (i), the stop display is configured at the center position L1 of the main display area Dm. In addition, even after the fluctuation time has expired, even if the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command cannot be received due to a problem or the like, the fluctuation fluctuation display is executed in order from the address 02E7H to the "LOOP" information of 02F0H. When it is updated, it returns to the specified address 02E7H and is repeatedly executed, so that the fluctuation is repeatedly displayed. If a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of fluctuation of a new third symbol is received without receiving the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command, the command is based on the reception of the command. After the three symbols are stopped and displayed, the variation display based on the variation display data table corresponding to the new variation pattern of the third symbol is started.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 14) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 13). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 13).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 13 in the example of FIG. 13). In "02F0H"), "LOOP" information indicating that the process is repeated by returning to the address 02E7H of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "LOOP" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 14) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 13, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table (see FIG. 13), the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 29) (see S1805 in FIG. 29). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 38 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 31 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 31B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 31B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 31 (b) see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 32 to 34) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 35 to 37) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 38 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 38 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 39) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 for each frame A drawing list (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 14) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 31 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 37) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 14) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 14, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 31 (b). ) Is executed, and the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 until the time counter becomes 1 or less (that is, the time counter becomes 1) (see S3007 in FIG. 35). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 40).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 31B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 40).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 23. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entry port 67. The through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the through-gate passage process (S107), the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot A, it is a hit of 16 rounds, and after the jackpot game, a probability variation is set in which the jackpot determination of the special symbol is executed with a high probability (S213). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215). Next, a jackpot confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop display (confirm stop display) of the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S216). End the process.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S217), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1. If the above is the case (S217: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S218), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S217: No), the processing of S218 is skipped and the processing of S219 is executed. In the process of S219, a deviation confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop display (confirm stop) the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S219). This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (during a probabilistic gaming state) (S302). Here, it is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag (not shown) is set to on. The probability variation flag is set to on when the jackpot A is set, and is set to off when the jackpot B is set.

When in the high-probability gaming state (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special for high-probability time. Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S302 that the game is in a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the pachinko machine 10 was acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the big hits of the special symbol, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match. , Judged as a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the hit is A (16R jackpot, the probability variation of the special symbol is set), and the value is "60 to 99". If it is within the range, it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short period of time for a normal symbol) (see FIG. 10 (a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 23). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entry port 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 23) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8B).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 10B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hitting is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entry port 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first ball slot 64 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S617), and shift to the process of S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 23) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 23) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 23, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 16) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 18) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17) ends, the first symbol display device The change display executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process is executed. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 21 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 25) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 25), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 25). That is, since the power off flag is turned on before the power off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1208 goes through the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1311, the variable display setting process, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process (S1311), the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1311), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). The variation pattern type based on the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern storage area 223d (S1404), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 28) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 28) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223a is set. After the processing of S1409 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1409 to the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223a is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1408, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), then it is determined whether or not the main control device 110 has received the definite command (S1410). When the disconnection confirmation command is received from the main controller 110 (S1410: Yes), the disconnection confirmation command reception process is executed (S1411). The details of the error confirmation command reception process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG. 27 (a). A process of executing a judgment as to whether or not the hit / fail judgment is matched with the indicated deviation, and displaying an error code (for example, H01 or the like) indicating that the hit / fail judgment does not match is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 if they do not match. Will be executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when the loss confirmation command is not received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation command output from the main control device 110 is received (S1412). When the jackpot confirmation command is received (S1412: No), the jackpot confirmation command reception process is executed (S1413). The jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 27 (b), but the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 It is determined whether the result of the hit / fail judgment shown and the hit / fail judgment result indicated by the received jackpot confirmation command match, and if they do not match, an error code indicating that the third symbol display device 81 does not match (for example, A01 etc.) is displayed.

In this way, at the time of the stop display (confirmation stop) of the third symbol, the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are brought into contact with each other by collating the hit / fail judgment indicated by the confirmation command with the received hit / fail judgment. You can check the communication status. The fluctuation pattern command output by the main control device 110 is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to be a hit fluctuation pattern due to the influence of noise or the like even if the fluctuation pattern is out of alignment, and the hit is notified by the third symbol. Even in this case, the error code is displayed because the winning / failing judgment does not match by the confirmation command, so even if the jackpot game is not started, the game store side confirms the error code and informs the player the details of the problem. Can be explained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the error code is displayed and the error notification is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning / failing determination may be re-notified based on the winning / failing determination transmitted by the confirmation command. Further, not only the hit / fail judgment but also the stop type information and the like may be added to the confirmation command to execute the collation of the jackpot type and the like, and to execute the notification and the correction of the contents.

If the jackpot confirmation command has not been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1418), and the process returns to the main process. .. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27 (a), the disconnection confirmation command reception process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing the loss confirmation command reception process (S1411). This loss confirmation command reception process (S1411) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1411 in FIG. 26), and as described above, the main control device. When the deviation confirmation command output by 110 is received, the verification is performed to see if the acceptance / rejection determination indicated by the received fluctuation pattern and the deviation determination / rejection determination indicated by the deviation confirmation command match.

In this deviation confirmation command reception process (S1411), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is a deviation pattern (S1501). When the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern storage area 223d is a hit variation pattern (that is, the collation results do not match) (S1501: No), the display control device 114 is referred to the third symbol display device. A display error notification command is set (generated) instructing 81 to display an error code (for example, H01 or the like) indicating that the command has been received and the confirmation command has not been matched. After that, the process of S1503 is executed.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern (that is, the collation results match) (S1501: Yes), the processing of S1502 is skipped and the processing of S1503 is performed. Execute. In the process of S1503, a display loss confirmation command is set (generated) instructing the display control device 114 to stop display (confirm stop display) of the third symbol being displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81. (S1503).

Next, the jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413). This jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1413 in FIG. 26), and as described above, the main control device. When the jackpot confirmation command is received from 110, verification is performed to see if the winning / failing determination indicated by the received fluctuation pattern and the winning / failing determination indicated by the jackpot confirmation command match.

In this jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is a hit fluctuation pattern (S1601). When the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern storage area 223d is an out-of-order variation pattern (that is, the matching results do not match) (S1601: No), the display control device 114 is referred to the third symbol display device. A display error notification command instructing 81 to display an error code (for example, A01 or the like) indicating that the jackpot confirmation command is received and does not match is set (generated) (S1602). After that, the process of S1603 is executed.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d is a hit fluctuation pattern (that is, the matching results match) (S1601: Yes), the processing of S1602 is skipped and the processing of S1603 is performed. Execute. In the process of S1603, a display jackpot confirmation command is set (generated) instructing the display control device 114 to stop display (confirm stop display) of the third symbol being displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81. (S1603).

In this way, since the pass / fail judgment is added to the confirmation command output by the main control device 110, the hit / fail judgment received by the voice lamp control device 113 can be collated when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Therefore, even if the hit / fail judgment determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is a hit variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 receives it as a deviation pattern command due to the influence of noise or the like, and notifies the deviation. Is notified by the third symbol, and even if the jackpot game is started after that, the clerk on the game store side can confirm the error code and explain the details of the defect to the player in detail. Further, by displaying the error code, even if an illegal signal or the like is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hanging board or the like, it can be detected at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the error code is displayed to notify the error, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, although it is actually a hit / fail judgment, the deviation pattern is affected by noise or the like. Even when the variation display of the third symbol based on the above is displayed, by receiving the jackpot confirmation command, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as being re-lottery, etc., and the mode is switched to the third symbol notification mode indicating the jackpot. Therefore, it may be configured to execute the correction of the effect so as to match the contents. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of a more accurate hit / fail judgment, and it is possible to suppress the player from having a distrust of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 26). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223c provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1705). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1705: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223c is turned off (S1706), and then in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (see FIG. 26), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707).

The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. In the process of S1709, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). ..

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 29, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 29) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 29) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 30, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S1902 and S1902, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 29. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1803, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 38 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 38 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 31 (b)). The determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 31 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 31 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), and the main control device 110 gave a voice lamp control to the start instruction of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (a). FIG. 31A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (b). FIG. 31B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 14) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 31B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. The command determination process (S2102) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process (S2102) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34.

In the display setting process (S2103), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined in the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 14 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (S2102), as shown in FIG. 32, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201:). No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 33A. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, when the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted to 1, the timekeeping counter 233h may be updated (set) to 0 until a display loss confirmation command or a display jackpot confirmation command is received thereafter. Absent. Therefore, by receiving the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command, the confirmation display flag is set to ON and the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed stop display).

Returning to the description of FIG. 32. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (b). FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 31B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2403).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 32, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not a display loss confirmation command is received among the unprocessed commands (S2208). When the display loss confirmation command is received (S2208), the value of the time counter 233h is set to 0 (S2209). In the processing of S2208, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not the display jackpot confirmation command is received among the unprocessed commands (S2210). When the display jackpot confirmation command is received (S2210: Yes), the value of the time counter 233h is set to 0 (S2211).

In this way, when the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command is received, the value of the time counter 233h of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is set to 0. When the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is set to 0, the confirmation display flag is set to ON in the processing of the display setting process (FIG. 35, S2103) described later, and the display is variable and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The process of displaying the confirmation stop of the third symbol is executed. Therefore, the stop display of the third symbol can be performed based on the reception of the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command by the display control device 114.

In the processing of S2210, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot confirmation command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and the error command is issued. If there is (S2212: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to the processing of S2201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2501). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2502), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process (FIG. 35, S2103), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2501, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2502 is determined. , The process is executed so that the warning image corresponding to the error type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S2502 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status. Here, as an example of the error type, in the loss confirmation command reception process (FIG. 27 (a), S1411) or the jackpot confirmation command reception process (FIG. 27 (b), S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. When each of the set display error notification commands is received, the corresponding error determination flag is set to ON, and the corresponding warning image (error code) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 32. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2212 (S2212: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2214), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2214 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2214 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 31B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 33 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 33 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 33A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 35, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 35. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the last address is set by the "LOOP" information as in the variable display data table shown in FIG. 12, it is determined as No in the processing of S3202.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the variable display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display is performed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the data table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process is performed. Exit and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 35 and continues. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is larger than 1 (S3007). When it is determined that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is larger than 1 (S3007: Yes), the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3008). On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 1 or less (S3007: No), the process of S3008 is skipped and the process of S3009 is executed.

In the process of S3009, it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S3009). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3009: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counting counter 233h is 0 or less (S3009: Yes), the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed, and the main control unit 110 has A loss confirmation command or a jackpot confirmation command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display loss confirmation command or a display hit confirmation command to the display control device 114 and displays the command. It means that the control device 114 has received the command. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3010).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3010: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3011), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3012). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3013), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3014). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3015), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3016), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The final display effect of the stop symbol set in the final display data table is shown in FIG. 5 (i) with the same symbol as the third symbol which is swayed and fluctuated by the third symbol display device 81 and temporarily stopped. The same symbol as the shaking center on which the third symbol is displayed is set at the center position L1 of the main display area Dm as shown. The timing at which this definite display data table is set is normally substantially the same as the end time of the fluctuation time, and as shown in FIG. 7, the third symbol is at the position of the shaking center in FIG. 5 (i). The display device 81 is switched from the state in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped for 200 ms to the same display as the shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)) set in the confirmed display data table.

As a result, the variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is obtained by repeating a series of shaking fluctuations as shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (i) a plurality of times, and then FIG. 5 (i). ) Can be shown to the player so that the third symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed at the timing when the shaking fluctuation of one cycle is completed. In addition, the display control device 114 cannot transfer the image information from the variable display data table in time, and the update is not performed normally every 20 ms, so that the image before the update is displayed in two frames or a plurality of frames in succession (display). When a control process failure occurs), a display loss confirmation command or a display jackpot confirmation command is received before the drawing contents displayed at the end of the fluctuation set in the fluctuation display data table are transferred. However, since the shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)) displayed at the end of the shaking cycle is continuously displayed (stopped display) for 200 ms, the shaking fluctuation is within that range. If there is a deviation, switch from the display of the shaking center (Fig. 5 (i)) to the confirmed display of the third symbol, which is the same as the shaking center (Fig. 5 (i)) set in the confirmation display data table, as in the normal case. Can be done. Therefore, since the final display due to the shaking fluctuation and the display content that is confirmed and displayed match, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, in the same display mode each time, the third symbol can be confirmed and stopped based on the timing at which the main control device 110 outputs the confirmation command after shaking and fluctuating.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3016 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3016, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3017). If the demo display flag is off (S3017: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3018) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3019). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3020). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3021), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3022), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3017, if the demo display flag is on (S3017: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 31B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3301 (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 31 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 31 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 31 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 35 to 44) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 39) (see S3301: No in FIG. 38 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3502), and if it is the transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3509. In the process of S3509, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3509). The discrimination in the processing of S3509 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3509, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3509: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3509 (S3509: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3510). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3510, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3511), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in various effects can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 14 (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 31B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the variation display data table of the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the variation time corresponding to each variation pattern. A mode (dynamic display mode) is set. In the variable display mode of the third symbol, in the variable display data table, until the third symbol is displayed as the final symbol of the third symbol by the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation stop command, the third symbol is displayed. The shaking fluctuation as shown in FIG. 5 for notifying that the symbol is temporarily stopped is executed. Then, after the shaking fluctuations are executed a plurality of times, from the display of the third symbol in the state of the shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)) displayed at the timing when one cycle of the shaking fluctuations ends to the end of the fluctuation time. During the 200 ms period, the display of the shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)) is repeatedly displayed (stop display), and when the fluctuation end time is reached, the same third symbol as that of the shaking center (FIG. 5 (i)) is confirmed. It is switched to the display mode and displayed, and the confirmation is stopped. At this time, in reality, the display is switched at 20 ms intervals, and the third symbol, which has been swaying and fluctuating, is stopped and then displayed as a definite stop for 200 ms, but it is extremely short from the player. Since it is stopped, it seems that the stop is displayed at the timing when one cycle of the shaking fluctuation is completed. Therefore, the final image due to the shaking fluctuation and the third symbol that is confirmed and displayed can be matched, and the third symbol can be stopped without a sense of discomfort. In addition, since the third symbol appears to the player to be stopped in the same stopping mode for each variation, the game can be played without discomfort. Further, even if a processing failure occurs in the display control device 114, if the processing is dropped within the standby time of 200 ms, the display can be switched to the final display while the third symbol is stopped at the position of the shaking center. It is possible, and the final display of the shaking fluctuation and the display mode of the final display can be matched.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the display deviation confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command cannot be received at the timing of the end of the fluctuation time due to some trouble, the shaking fluctuation is restarted again. It is possible to suppress the problem that only the symbol stops without synchronizing with the first symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is configured to stop at the timing when one cycle of the shaking fluctuation is completed for 200 ms, but the setting is not limited to this and is set within a range in which the player does not feel that the game is stopped. You may. Further, it may be configured to stop and display for a certain period beyond the end time of the fluctuation time. With this configuration, the timing of the main control device 110 and the timing of the display control device 114 are different from each other, and the main control device 110 issues a confirmation command after the fluctuation time measured by the display control device 114 has elapsed. Even when the output is performed, the display mode of the final display of the shaking fluctuation and the final display of the final display can be matched. Therefore, the stop display of the third symbol can be fixedly stopped in the same display mode and stopped without discomfort.

In the present embodiment, the stop display is performed in the shaking center display mode for 200 ms until the end time of the fluctuation time, but the display mode is not limited to this, and the shaking center display mode is more than the fluctuation display in the shaking fluctuation display mode. It may be configured to switch and display so as to display in a display mode similar to (close to). Specifically, the swing width may be made smaller than that at the time of swing fluctuation to display the third symbol. In addition, the size of the symbol may be slightly changed depending on the position of the shaking center. With this configuration, the third symbol can be dynamically displayed even for 200 ms, and the variable display time between the first symbol and the third symbol can be more synchronized.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 56. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol, the third symbol is displayed at the shaking center at the timing when the shaking fluctuation of one cycle is completed for 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation time. Stop display and switch to the final display mode of the 3rd symbol at the same shaking center as the 3rd symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the display deviation confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command received at the end of the fluctuation time. The case of displaying is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is set with a fourth symbol that blinks and fluctuates in synchronization with the first symbol and the third symbol. The fourth symbol is set, the main controller 110 sends a confirmation command for fixing and stopping the third symbol at the end of the fluctuation time, and 200 ms later, the fourth symbol is dedicated to the fourth symbol. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the fourth symbol is stopped after the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped by transmitting the fourth confirmation command.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 41 (a) shows the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the second embodiment. 41 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, the display screen is held in the left display area Ds1 configured on the left side of the sub display area Ds with respect to the first embodiment. The number of sphere symbols is displayed, and the fourth symbol is displayed in the right display area Ds2 configured in the right side area of the sub display area Ds. Since the reserved ball number symbol displayed in the left display area has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fourth symbol displayed in the left display area Ds2 is a symbol that is variably displayed on the display control device 114 in synchronization with the first symbol that the main control device 110 lights up on the first symbol display device 37. That is, the fluctuation is controlled in synchronization with the third symbol.

The fourth symbol indicates that the variable display is performed by repeatedly displaying the lighting (aa) and the extinguishing (bb) every 20 ms as shown in FIG. 41 (c). Even when the fourth symbol is turned off, a thin rectangular line indicating the outline of the fourth symbol is displayed. The role of the fourth symbol is to clearly notify the player of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the first symbol in synchronization with the first symbol. As a result, the player can indicate that the fluctuation continues even if the third symbol is erased for a certain period of time in the fluctuation pattern production mode by the blinking display mode of the fourth symbol. It can be clearly identified. Further, even when the third symbol is shaken and fluctuated, the player can clearly determine that the third symbol is in a temporarily stopped state because the fourth symbol is blinking and displayed. In addition, when the blinking display mode of the fourth symbol is turned off and stopped, the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is notified by the third symbol. Can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42B, the fourth symbol is configured to be displayed in the uppermost layer so that the player can see it at any time. Further, the third symbol is a driving object in a gaming machine in which a part or all of the third symbol is hidden in the background due to the effect, or a driving object is arranged so as to be driven on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and overlap the display area. In some cases, it may not be visible to the player. Therefore, even if the third symbol cannot be seen by the player due to the effect, it is possible to identify whether the display is variable or the stop display by the fourth symbol, and the player is confused. Can be prevented.

As will be described later, the main control device 110 has a dedicated confirmation command (disengagement confirmation command or jackpot confirmation command) for displaying the confirmation stop of the third symbol and a dedicated confirmation command (definite stop command for fixing and stopping the fourth symbol). The 4th definite command for loss or the 4th definite command for jackpot) is generated and output individually. By outputting the confirmation command of the fourth symbol with a delay of 200 ms from the confirmation command of the third symbol, the main control device 110 can stop and display the third symbol and then stop and display the fourth symbol. As a result, by displaying the 3rd symbol and the 4th symbol as a fixed stop display with a common confirmation command, the player can stop the 4th symbol later than the 3rd symbol. It is possible to prevent the symbol from being visible, shortening the fixed stop period of the symbol, and making it difficult to understand the fixed stop of the symbol. Therefore, by stopping the fourth symbol 200 ms after the third symbol, the player can more clearly recognize the stop of the third symbol. Even if the fourth symbol is stopped for 200 ms from the third symbol, 200 ms is extremely short for the player. Therefore, the third symbol and the fourth symbol are stopped at the same time in the appearance of the player. It looks like it is displaying. In this way, it is preferable to set the delay time within a range in which the players seem to be stopped at the same time.

FIG. 43 is a timing chart of fluctuations between the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the deviation pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the third symbol is different from the first embodiment in that the shaking fluctuation is repeatedly executed until the end of the fluctuation time and that the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol is added. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 43, the fourth symbol is a display output by the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 based on a display variation pattern command output by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command for use, the lighting display (aa) and the blinking display (bb) are repeated every 20 ms to start the fluctuation display. As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (i), even when the three symbols of the third symbol are temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is executed, the fourth symbol is the same as before the shaking fluctuation is executed. In addition, the variable display is executed by repeating turning on and off every 20 ms. Based on the reception of the display deviation confirmation command, the third symbol is displayed as a confirmation stop, but the fourth symbol continues the variable display for 200 ms thereafter and receives the display deviation confirmation command. Then, the stop display is displayed with the confirmation display of the off display. By configuring in this way, the third symbol is displayed at the position of the shaking center in the same definite display mode as the final display of the shaking fluctuation, and then the fourth symbol is displayed 200 ms later. Since the display is stopped by the display confirmation command, the confirmation stop period of the third symbol can be provided internally. Further, from the player's point of view, since 200 ms is an extremely short time, it seems that the third symbol and the fourth symbol are stopped at the same time, which may give the player a sense of discomfort or the third symbol. It is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation with the fourth symbol does not seem to be the same fluctuation time.

Further, since the third symbol causes the shaking fluctuation to temporarily stop, the final display mode of the shaking fluctuation and the final display mode of the shaking fluctuation are different when the fixed stop display is displayed (for example, the final display mode of the shaking fluctuation is the shaking down). In the case of the display at the position and the confirmation display mode is the display at the position of the shaking center), the symbol seems to fluctuate when the confirmation is stopped, and the player is skeptical whether it fluctuates thereafter. However, even in such a case, by displaying the stop display of the fourth symbol after a short time of 200 ms, the stop period of the third symbol can be provided, and the third symbol can be more reliably displayed. The stop display can be displayed, and the player can be made to appear that the third symbol and the fourth symbol are stopped at the same time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the fourth determination timer 203f is added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 8) in the first embodiment. The fourth confirmation timer 203f confirms the third symbol by the jackpot fourth confirmation command or the missed fourth confirmation command, which is a confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to display the confirmation stop of the fourth symbol. It is a counter for measuring the delay time in order to delay for 200 ms after the stop display is displayed. The fourth confirmation timer 203f is set to 0, which is an initial value in the state where the RAM is initialized, and is the process of S240 of the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 48, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In, 100 is set when the jackpot confirmation command or the loss confirmation command is set. The fourth confirmation timer 203f is a fourth confirmation command in the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 48, S104), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the process of S231 of the transmission process (FIG. 49, S230), the numbers are subtracted one by one. If the fourth confirmation timer 203f is 1 or more, the fourth confirmation command device process (FIG. 49, S230) is the execution processing interval of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) and is executed every 2 ms. It will be subtracted by 1 each time. That is, when 100 is set in the 4th confirmation timer 203f, 200 ms elapses until the 4th confirmation timer 203f becomes 0. Based on the fact that the 4th confirmation timer 203f becomes 0, a jackpot 4th confirmation command or a missed 4th confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to display the confirmation stop of the 4th symbol is set. ..

In this way, by setting 100 to the 4th confirmation timer 203f based on setting the jackpot confirmation command or the loss confirmation command, the jackpot 4th confirmation command or the loss 4th confirmation command is voice lamp controlled 200 ms later. It can be output to the device 113.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, in the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the voice lamp is compared with the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 8). In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113, the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d has been deleted, and the symbol state storage area 223e has been added.

The symbol state storage area 223e is a storage area for storing the result of the hit / fail judgment indicated by each command for the deviation confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110. is there. When the received command is a definite command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores data indicating that the command is deviated in the symbol state storage area 223e, while the received command is a jackpot confirmation command. In that case, it is stored in the symbol state storage area 223e (see FIG. 52). The data related to the hit / fail determination stored in the symbol state storage area 223e is the disengagement fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 53 (a), S1430) or the jackpot fourth confirmation command executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the reception process (FIGS. 53 (a), S1450), matching whether the hit / fail judgment indicated by the received jackpot 4th confirmation command or the missed 4th confirmation command matches the hit / fail judgment stored in the symbol state storage area 223e. Is executed. In this process, if it is determined that they do not match, the third symbol display device 81 is notified of the fact (for example, if the third symbol display device 81 is received and does not match, an error such as H02 occurs. A display error notification command is set (generated) instructing that the code be displayed, and if the jackpot fourth confirmation command is received and does not match, an error code such as A01 is displayed).

The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 11) in the following points, and is the same in other points. is there. Only the differences will be described below.

In the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment, the variation display data table for displaying and controlling the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 stored in the data table storage area 233b. (See FIG. 46), the transfer data table has been changed respectively.

The variable display data table according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 42 shows one of the variation display modes corresponding to the variation pattern command in which the third symbol is specified. In the variable display data table of the second embodiment, the variable display mode of the fourth symbol is set for each address in common with the third symbol. When each address is designated, various data for displaying the designated third symbol and lighting data of the fourth symbol are also transferred and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this fluctuation display data table, the address corresponding to the end time of the fluctuation time is 02E6H, and if it is normal here, the display deviation confirmation command is received and the address is set to 02F1H, and the shaking center. The display at the position of is repeatedly displayed (stop display). In the second embodiment, the sway fluctuation is continuously performed until the end of the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation time is set to end on the display of the sway center which is the end of one cycle of the sway fluctuation. On the other hand, since the fourth confirmation command for display is normally received 200 ms later than this, the fourth symbol is repeatedly lit and blinked every 20 ms until then. Then, when the display loss confirmation command is received after 200 ms, both the third symbol and the fourth symbol are replaced with the confirmed stop display symbols and the stop display is performed. Since the fourth symbol merely repeats the blinking display, it does not cause much discomfort even if it is switched to the off display, which is the fixed stop display, while the on display is displayed. Here, when the final stop display and the fixed stop display of the shaking fluctuation are different from each other, the third symbol looks as if the symbol has changed momentarily, and the player tends to feel a sense of discomfort. However, in the configuration of the second embodiment, the third symbol repeats the shaking fluctuation until the fluctuation end time is reached, and when the fluctuation time end time is reached, the shaking center is displayed at the timing when the shaking fluctuation of one cycle is completed. When the display disengagement confirmation command is received at that timing, the address of 02F1H is specified and the display of the shaking center is repeatedly displayed. Therefore, when the fourth confirmation command for display is received and the confirmation display is switched to, the display mode is switched to the same confirmation display mode as the shaking center display mode, which is the confirmation display mode, so that the display is switched to a different display when the confirmation display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort that momentarily fluctuates when the third symbol is fixedly stopped.

As shown in FIG. 47, the transfer data table in the second embodiment has been changed in response to the change in the variable display data table, and when the address of 02F3H is specified, it returns to 02F1H. The difference is that "LOOP" information that repeats the transfer is added. The transfer data table of FIG. 47 corresponds to the variable display data table of FIG. 46.

In the present embodiment, when the display-off fourth confirmation command cannot be received due to some problem, the display mode of the shaking center is repeated in the third symbol, but the shaking fluctuation is not limited to this. It may be configured to resume. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player even when a problem occurs that the third symbol and the fourth symbol are synchronized.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. An effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. The effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is a flag indicating that a display loss confirmation command or a display jackpot confirmation command has been received. When the power is turned on or when the work RAM 233 is initialized, the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is set to off. It is set to ON in the process of S2211 of the command determination process (FIG. 55, S2102) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Further, it is set to off in the processing of S2310 of the fluctuation pattern command processing (FIG. 54, S2205) of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 and the processing of S3211 of the pointer update processing (FIG. 3005, S3005), respectively.

A special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (FIG. 48, S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 48, S104) of the second embodiment, the content of the special symbol variation start processing (S208) is changed from the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 16, S104) of the first embodiment. Each process of S220, S230, and S240 is added. Each process of S201 to S219 in the second embodiment executes the same process as each process of S201 to S219 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S220, it is determined whether the fourth determination timer 203f is larger than 0 (that is, not 0) (S220). If the fourth confirmation timer 203f has a value greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the fourth confirmation command transmission process is executed (S203). The details of the fourth confirmation command transmission process (FIG. 49, S230) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. However, it is determined whether 200 ms has passed since the loss confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command was output, and the loss is determined. A process of setting the 4 confirmation command or the 4th big hit confirmation command to be output to the voice lamp control device 114 after 200 ms has elapsed is executed.

On the other hand, when the fourth determination timer 203f is 0 (S220: No), the process of S201 is executed. Since the process of S201 is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, after the jackpot confirmation command is set in the processing of S216 or after the loss confirmation command is set in the processing of S219, the processing is executed in S240. In the process of S240, 100 is set in the fourth confirmation timer 203f (S240). In this way, when the loss confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command is set, the value of 100 is set in the fourth confirmation timer 203f, and 200 ms after the loss confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command is set, the second confirmation later described. 4 In the confirmation command transmission process (FIG. 49, S230), the missed fourth confirmation command or the jackpot fourth confirmation command can be transmitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a fourth confirmation command transmission process (S230), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 48, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the fourth confirmation command transmission process (S230).

In the fourth confirmation command transmission process (FIG. 49, S230), first, a process of subtracting 1 from the fourth confirmation timer 203f is executed (S231). It is determined whether the value of the fourth fixed timer 203f after the subtraction is 0 (S232). If the value of the fourth confirmation timer 203f is not 0 (S232: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the fourth confirmation timer 203f is 0 (S232: Yes), it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S233). If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol this time is incorrect (S234: No), the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the shaking center (see FIG. 42 (i)). Set (generate) the fourth definite command that is instructed to be displayed repeatedly (S234). On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S233: Yes), the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed at the shaking center (see FIG. 42 (i)). A jackpot fourth confirmation command instructing the repeated display in the mode is set (S235).

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, in the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 48, S104), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 15) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A special symbol variation start process (S208), which is one process, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 50, S208). In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 50, S208) of the second embodiment, the process of S320 is added to the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 17, S208) of the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same process as the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 17, S208) in the first embodiment is executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

When the setting of the variation pattern command is executed in the process of S310, the process of S320 is executed. In the processing of S320, the processing of the fourth confirmation timer 203f is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S320). After that, the process of S311 is executed. Since the process of S311 is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this way, the value of the 4th confirmation timer 203f is reset to the initial value based on the setting of the fluctuation pattern command, so that an abnormal value is stored in the 4th confirmation timer 203f due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is, it can be reset to a normal value at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a normal state at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormal operation occurs and the game cannot be played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a command determination process (S1311), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). The command determination process (FIG. 51, S1311) of the second embodiment is the command determination process (S1411) and the jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413), as opposed to the command determination process (FIG. 26, S1311) of the first embodiment. The contents of the processing of S1420, S1430, S1440, and S1450 are added. The processes of S1401 to S1410 and S1412 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1410 and S1412 in the first embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 52 (a), a loss confirmation command reception process (S1411), which is one process of the command determination process (FIG. 51, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing this deviation confirmation command reception process (S1411).

In the disconnection confirmation command reception process (FIGS. 52 (a), S1411) in the second embodiment, first, data indicating the deviation is set in the symbol state storage area 223e (S1511). Here, in the present embodiment, "00000001" is set with 8-bit data. Next, a display loss confirmation command is set (generated) (S1512).

The jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413), which is one of the command determination processes (FIGS. 51 and S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). .. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413).

In the jackpot confirmation command reception process (FIGS. 52 (b), S1413) in the second embodiment, first, data indicating a jackpot is set in the symbol state storage area 223e (S1611). Here, in the present embodiment, "00000010" is set with 8-bit data. Next, a display jackpot confirmation command is set (generated) (S1612).

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the process of S1412, if the jackpot confirmation command has not been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether or not the missed fourth confirmation command has been received (S1420). If the 4th definite command is received (S1420: Yes), the 4th definite command reception process is executed (S1430).

The fourth definite command reception process (S1430) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the deviated fourth final command reception process (S1430). In this error 4th confirmation command reception process (FIG. 53, S1430), collation of whether or not the accuracy judgment result indicated by the received confirmation command of the third symbol matches the accuracy determination result of the error fourth confirmation command received this time Processing is executed, and if they do not match, error processing is executed.

In the disengagement fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 53 (a), S1430), first, it is determined whether the data stored in the symbol state storage area 223e is the data indicating the disengagement (S1431). Here, in determining whether the data is out of alignment, it is determined whether the data in the 8th bit is 1. When the data stored in the symbol state storage area 223e is data other than the deviation (S1431: No), when the display control device 114 is removed from the third symbol display device 81 and the fourth confirmation command is received. A display error notification command instructing to display an error code (H02 in this embodiment) for notifying that the collation results of the above are not matched is set (S1432). After that, the process of S1433 is executed. On the other hand, if the data stored in the symbol state storage area 223e is out of alignment (S1431: Yes), the process of S1433 is executed. In the process of S1433, a display-off fourth confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to display the third symbol and the fourth symbol which are variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (S1433).

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the process of S1420, if the missed fourth confirmation command is not received (S1420: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot fourth confirmation command is received (S1440). When the jackpot fourth confirmation command is received (S1440: Yes), the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process is executed (S1450).

The jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (S1450) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (S1450). In this jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 53 (b), S1450), the hit / fail judgment result indicated by the received confirmation command of the third symbol and the hit / fail judgment result of the jackpot fourth confirmation command received this time match. The collation process is executed, and if they do not match, error processing is executed.

In the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 53 (b), S1450), first, it is determined whether the data stored in the symbol state storage area 223e is the data indicating the jackpot (S1451). Here, in determining whether the data is a jackpot data, it is determined whether the data in the 8th bit is 0. When the data stored in the symbol state storage area 223e is data other than the jackpot (S1451: No), when the display control device 114 receives the jackpot 4th confirmation command to the third symbol display device 81. A display error notification command for instructing the display of an error code (A02 or the like in the present embodiment) for notifying that the collation results do not match is set (S1452). After that, the process of S1453 is executed. On the other hand, when the data stored in the symbol state storage area 223e is a big hit (S1451: Yes), the process of S14353 is executed. In the process of S1453, a display jackpot 4th confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to display the 3rd symbol and the 4th symbol which are variablely displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. (S1453).

In this way, the confirmation command for notifying that the third symbol is confirmed and stopped and the command for notifying that the fourth symbol is confirmed and stopped are configured to add information indicating the winning / failing judgment result, respectively, and the winning / failing judgment is made. By collating the information with each other, it is possible to determine whether or not a problem such as a communication error has occurred. Therefore, even if the third symbol is notified by the jackpot, if a problem that the jackpot game is not started occurs, how can the error code displayed on the third symbol display device 81 be determined? It is possible for the game store side to determine whether or not a problem has occurred, confirm it, and explain the details of the problem to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, in the second embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2102) which is one of the V interrupt processes (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. ) Will be explained. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2102) in the second embodiment. In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2102) of the second embodiment, the content of the variation pattern command process (S2205) is changed from the variation pattern command process (FIG. 32, S2102) of the first embodiment, and S2209, The process of S2211 is deleted, the process of S2218 is added, and the processes of S2230, S2240, and S2241 are added respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2102) in the first embodiment are executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 55, in the second embodiment, one of the command determination processes (FIG. 32, S2102) which is one of the V interrupt processes (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The variation pattern command processing (S2205), which is a processing, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 55, S2205) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 54, S2205) of the second embodiment, the processing of S2310 is added to the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 33 (a), S2205) of the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those of the variation pattern command process (FIG. 32, S2205) in the first embodiment are executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

When the pointer initialization is executed in the process of S2305, the process of S2310 is executed. In the process in S2310, the demo display flag, the confirmation display flag, and the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k are each set to off (S2310).

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will continue. In the process of S2208, when the display loss confirmation command is received (S2208: Yes), or in the process of S2210, when the display jackpot confirmation command is received (S2210: Yes), the process of S2216 is performed. Execute. In the process of S2216, the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is set to ON (S2216). When the effect symbol confirmation flag 223k is set to ON, in the pointer update process (FIG. 56, S3005) described later, if the time counter 233h is 1, the process of setting the pointer to the address 02F1H of the variable display data table is executed. .. By doing so, the third symbol display can be repeatedly displayed in the display mode of the shaking center. Therefore, the display can be stopped and displayed by the display of the shaking center of the third symbol until the display off 4th confirmation command or the display jackpot 4th confirmation command is received. When the 4th confirmation command for display loss or the 4th confirmation command for jackpot for display is received, the display is switched to the same confirmation display mode as the display of the shaking center, which is the confirmation display mode, so that the third symbol is momentarily displayed differently at the time of confirmation display. It is possible to suppress the player's feeling as if it fluctuated. Further, at that timing, the fourth symbol is also displayed as a fixed stop, so that it can be made to appear as if the fixed stop is displayed synchronously at the same timing.

In the process of S2210, when the display jackpot confirmation command is not received (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not the display off fourth confirmation command is received (S2230). When the display off display fourth confirmation command is received (S2230: Yes), the process of S2241 is executed. On the other hand, when the display jackpot fourth confirmation command is received (S2240: Yes), the process of S2241 is executed.

In the process of S2241, the clock counter 233h is set to 0 (S2241). In this way, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is set to 0 based on the reception of the display off 4th confirmation command or the display jackpot 4th confirmation command, so that the 3rd and 4th symbols are set at this timing. It is possible to display the confirmation stop based on the confirmation data table. Therefore, even in the internal processing, it is possible to easily synchronize the third symbol and the fourth symbol and display the fixed stop display. Therefore, it is not necessary to fix and stop the third symbol and the fourth symbol by separate processes, and the control load can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that only one of the third symbol and the fourth symbol is displayed as a fixed stop.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, in the second embodiment, the display setting processing process (FIG. 35, which is one process of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 31B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114). The pointer update process (S3005), which is one process of S2103), will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (FIG. 56, S3005) in the second embodiment. In the pointer update process (FIG. 56, S3005) of the second embodiment, the processes of S3210 and S3211 are added to the pointer update process (FIG. 37, S3005) of the first embodiment, respectively. For other processes, the same process as the pointer update process (FIG. 37, S3005) in the first embodiment is executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

In the process of S3202, when the data is not End information (S3202: No) or in the process of S3205, the process of S3210 is executed after the process of initializing the pointer is executed. In the process of S3210, it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h is 1 and the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is on (S3210). When the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 1 and the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is on (S3210: Yes), the pointer is set to the address 02F1H of the variable display data table, and the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is set to off. (S3211). On the other hand, if the time counter 233h is not 1 or the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is off (S3210: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, when the time counter 233h is 1, the final display mode of the last cycle of the shaking fluctuation is displayed, and when the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is on, the display loss confirmation command or display is displayed. Since the jackpot confirmation command has been received, the pointer is set so that the third symbol is repeatedly displayed in the display mode of the shaking center. Therefore, normally, the third symbol is displayed in the display mode of the shaking center until the fourth confirmation command for display or the fourth confirmation command for display jackpot is received after 200 ms, and after 200 ms. It is possible to make a definite stop in the definite stop display mode which is the display mode of the same shaking center.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is configured to stop at the timing when one cycle of the shaking fluctuation is completed for 200 ms, but the setting is not limited to this and is set within a range in which the player does not feel that the game is stopped. You may. Further, it may be configured to stop and display for a certain period beyond the end time of the fluctuation time. With this configuration, the timing of the main control device 110 and the timing of the display control device 114 are different from each other, and the main control device 110 issues a confirmation command after the fluctuation time measured by the display control device 114 has elapsed. Even when the output is performed, the display mode of the final display of the shaking fluctuation and the final display of the final display can be matched. Therefore, the stop display of the third symbol can be fixedly stopped in the same display mode and stopped without discomfort.

In the present embodiment, the display mode is configured to stop and display in the sway center display mode for 200 ms, but the display is not limited to this, and the display is closer to (closer to) the sway center display mode than the sway fluctuation display. It may be configured to be switched and displayed so as to be displayed in a mode. Specifically, the swing width may be made smaller than that at the time of swing fluctuation to display the third symbol. In addition, the size of the symbol may be slightly changed depending on the position of the shaking center. With this configuration, the third symbol can be dynamically displayed even for 200 ms, and the variable display time between the first symbol and the third symbol can be more synchronized.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 62. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol, the third symbol is displayed at the shaking center at the timing when the shaking fluctuation of one cycle is completed for 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation time. Stop display and switch to the final display mode of the 3rd symbol at the same shaking center as the 3rd symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the display deviation confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command received at the end of the fluctuation time. The case of displaying is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is set with a fourth symbol that blinks and fluctuates in synchronization with the first symbol and the third symbol. The fourth symbol is set, and the main control device 110 outputs a confirmation command for stopping and displaying the fourth symbol at the end of the fluctuation time, thereby synchronizing the third symbol and the fourth symbol to display the confirmed stop. In addition, if the output of the confirmation command of the 4th symbol is delayed or cannot be received due to some trouble or the like, the display mode of the shaking center is repeatedly displayed for the 3rd symbol, and the 4th symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured as described above.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table stored in the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment. The fluctuation variation of the third symbol, which is commonly executed in each variation display data table, is shown at address 02CAH. Since the fluctuation time set in each fluctuation display data table is different, the address at which the fluctuation fluctuation is started is different, but the same processing is executed as the content.

In the variable display data table shown in FIG. 57, the display content (drawing content) displayed at the timing when the address 02E6H ends the variable time is set. In the fluctuation display data table (see FIG. 12) in the first embodiment, the display mode of the shaking center is repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for 200 ms until the fluctuation time ends. After that, if the display loss confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command cannot be received, the shaking fluctuation is configured to be restarted. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display data table in the third embodiment, the display mode of the shaking center is repeatedly displayed for 200 ms until the fluctuation time ends, and the display deviation 4th confirmation command or the display jackpot 4th confirmation command is issued. Even if the third symbol cannot be confirmed and displayed because it cannot be received, the display of the shaking center is repeatedly displayed. On the other hand, the variable display of the fourth symbol is set to be continuously executed during that period so as to repeat blinking.

In this way, the fourth symbol continuously blinks and is repeatedly displayed, and the third symbol is repeatedly displayed in the display mode of the shaking center to notify the player that the third symbol has not been fixed and stopped. Can be done. Further, when the game store side confirms this state, it is possible to determine what kind of trouble has occurred inside the pachinko machine 10 from the variation display mode of the third symbol and the fourth symbol.

Note that FIG. 58 is an example of a transfer data table corresponding to each variation display data table stored in the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 of the third embodiment. The transfer data table shown in FIG. 58 corresponds to the variable display data table shown in FIG. 57. The detailed description will be omitted because it is the same as that of the first embodiment.

A special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (FIG. 59, S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 59, S104) of the third embodiment, the processing of S216 is in S250 and the processing of S219 is in S260, respectively, with respect to the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 16 and S104) of the first embodiment. has been edited. The processes of S201 to S215 and S217 to S218 in the third embodiment are the same as the processes of S201 to S215 and S217 to S218 in the first embodiment.

When the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S215, the jackpot fourth confirmation command is set (S250). Further, in the processing of S217, when the time saving medium counter is 0 (S217: No) or the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S217: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203e is subtracted by 1, and then the fourth is removed. Set the confirmation command (S260).

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a command determination process (S1311), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). In the command determination process (FIG. 60, S1311) of the third embodiment, the processes of S141 to S1413 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 26, S1311) of the first embodiment, and the processes of S1420, S1440, S1460, and S1470 are deleted. Each process of is added. Each process of S1401 to S1409 in the third embodiment executes the same process as each process of S1401 to S1409 in the first embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the process of S1408, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not the missed fourth confirmation command has been received (S1420). If the 4th definite command is received (S1420: Yes), the 4th definite command reception process is executed (S1460).

Here, with reference to FIG. 61A, the disengagement fourth confirmation command reception process (S1460) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 (a) is a flowchart showing the deviated fourth final command reception process (S1460).

In the deviating fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 61 (a), S1460), first, it is determined whether the data stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d is deviated data (that is, whether the collation results match). (S1461). If the data stored in the variation pattern storage area 223d is data other than the outliers (that is, the collation results do not match) (S1461: No), the collation result is obtained when the outlier 4th confirmation command is received. A display error notification command is set to instruct the display control device 114 to display an error code (H03 in the present embodiment) indicating that they do not match on the third symbol display device 81 (S1462). After that, the process of S1463 is executed. On the other hand, when the out-of-order data is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d (that is, the collation results match) (S1461: Yes), the process of S1462 is skipped and the process of S1463 is executed. In the process of S1463, the display control device 114 is set with the display-off fourth confirmation command instructing the display control device 114 to stop and display the third symbol and the fourth symbol (S1463).

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the process of S1420, if the missed fourth confirmation command has not been received (S1420: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot fourth confirmation command has been received (S1440). When the jackpot fourth confirmation command is received (S1440), the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process is executed (S1470).

Here, the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (S1470) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (S1470).

In the jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 61 (b), S1470), first, it is determined whether the data stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d is jackpot data (that is, whether the collation results match). (S1471). If the data stored in the variation pattern storage area 223d is data other than the jackpot (that is, the collation results do not match) (S1471: No), the collation result is obtained when the jackpot fourth confirmation command is received. A display error notification command is set to instruct the display control device 114 to display an error code (A03 in the present embodiment) indicating that they do not match on the third symbol display device 81 (S1472). After that, the process of S1473 is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot data is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 223d (that is, the collation results match) (S1471: Yes), the process of S1472 is skipped and the process of S1473 is executed. In the process of S1473, a display jackpot fourth confirmation command instructing the display control device 114 to display the third symbol and the fourth symbol as a confirmation stop is set (S1473).

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 62, S2102), which is one of the V interrupt processes (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. ) Will be explained. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (FIG. 62, S2102) in the third embodiment. In the command determination process (FIG. 62, S2102) of the third embodiment, the processes S2208 to S2211 are deleted from the variation pattern command process (FIG. 32, S2102) of the first embodiment, and the processes S2230 to S2231, S2240 are deleted. Each process of ~ S2241 is added. As for other processes, the same processes as the command determination process (FIG. 32, S2102) in the first embodiment are executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

In the process of S2204, when the display stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display off fourth confirmation command (S2230). When it is determined that there is a display off fourth confirmation command (S2230: Yes), the value of the time counter 233h is set to 0 (S2231). On the other hand, if the display loss confirmation command has not been received (S2230: No), it is determined whether or not the display jackpot fourth confirmation command has been received (S2240). When the display jackpot fourth confirmation command is received (S2240: Yes), the value of the time counter 233h is set to 0 (S2241).

In this way, when the display off 4th confirmation command or the display jackpot 4th confirmation command is received, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is set to 0, so that the 3rd symbol and the 4th symbol are confirmed. Confirmed display based on the display data table. Therefore, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be fixedly stopped at the synchronized timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is configured to stop at the timing when one cycle of the shaking fluctuation is completed for 200 ms, but the setting is not limited to this and is set within a range in which the player does not feel that the game is stopped. You may. Further, it may be configured to stop and display for a certain period beyond the end time of the fluctuation time. With this configuration, the timing of the main control device 110 and the timing of the display control device 114 are different from each other, and the main control device 110 issues a confirmation command after the fluctuation time measured by the display control device 114 has elapsed. Even when the output is performed, the display mode of the final display of the shaking fluctuation and the final display of the final display can be matched. Therefore, the stop display of the third symbol can be fixedly stopped in the same display mode and stopped without discomfort.

In the present embodiment, the display mode is configured to stop and display in the sway center display mode for 200 ms, but the display is not limited to this, and the display is closer to (closer to) the sway center display mode than the sway fluctuation display. It may be configured to be switched and displayed so as to be displayed in a mode. Specifically, the swing width may be made smaller than that at the time of swing fluctuation to display the third symbol. In addition, the size of the symbol may be slightly changed depending on the position of the shaking center. With this configuration, the third symbol can be dynamically displayed even for 200 ms, and the variable display time between the first symbol and the third symbol can be more synchronized.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 73. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol, the third symbol is displayed at the shaking center at the timing when the shaking fluctuation of one cycle is completed for 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation time. Stop display and switch to the final display mode of the 3rd symbol at the same shaking center as the 3rd symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the display deviation confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command received at the end of the fluctuation time. The case of displaying is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a fourth symbol that blinks and fluctuates in synchronization with the first symbol and the third symbol that are lit and controlled by the voice lamp control device 81 is provided. The main control device 110 outputs a confirmation command for stopping and displaying the third symbol at the end of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a command for determining and stopping the third symbol to the display control device 114 based on the command. The display control device 114 outputs a command indicating that the third symbol has been fixedly stopped to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fixed stop display of the third symbol. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured in the first embodiment in that the fourth symbol is fixedly stopped based on the command so that the stop timings of the third symbol and the fourth symbol are more synchronized. It is different from the pachinko machine 10.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, in the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, the fourth symbol LED900 is added to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, in the fourth embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are communicably connected to each other with respect to the electrical configuration (see FIG. 8) of the first embodiment. A fourth symbol LED 900, which is electrically connected so as to be controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fourth symbol LED 900 is voice lamp controlled in synchronization with the first symbol whose main control device 110 is lit by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol whose display control device 114 is variablely displayed on the third symbol control device 81. This is an LED for displaying a fourth symbol whose lighting is controlled by the device 113. As shown in FIG. 63, the fourth symbol LED 900 is provided in the lower part of the center frame 86 of the variable display device unit 80, and is always arranged at a position visible to the player. The fourth symbol, which is lit and displayed by the fourth symbol LED900, is lit and displayed in synchronization with the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner. It is a design for notifying the player of something in an easy-to-understand manner. By providing the 4th symbol, the 3rd symbol may be temporarily not displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 or the 3rd symbol may be stopped and displayed according to the variation display mode set in the variation pattern. Even if such a display effect is performed, the player can easily recognize that the fluctuation time is in effect if the fourth symbol is lit and displayed.

FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65, the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment has a display variation pattern storage area in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 with respect to the display control device 114 (see FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. 233m has been added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display variation pattern storage area 233m is a display variation indicating the type of variation pattern from the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S2221 of the command determination process (FIGS. 71, S2102) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, which will be described later. This is data for storing data related to the variation pattern indicated by the received display variation pattern command based on the reception of the pattern command. Here, as the data to be stored, the data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is stored, but the display fluctuation pattern command may be stored as it is, or the data corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command in advance (for example, pass / fail determination). The result of the above, data such as reach, etc.) may be stored. In the present embodiment, the result of the pass / fail judgment indicated by the display variation pattern command is stored. The display variation pattern storage area 233m is set to 0, which is an initial value when the power is turned on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the main process (S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1300). In the main process of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 66, S1300), the content of the command determination process (S1311) is changed from the main process of the first embodiment (FIG. 25, S1300), and the process of S1330 is added. ing. The processes of S1301 to S1310, S1312, and S1315 to S1319 in the fourth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1310, S1312, and S1315 to S1319 in the first embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

A command determination process, which is one process of the main process (FIG. 66, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1300) in the fourth embodiment. In the command determination process (FIG. 67, S1311) of the fourth embodiment, the command determination process (S1411) of the first embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 26, S1311) of the first embodiment. ), The jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1413) has been changed to the jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1490), and the process of S1520 has been added. The processes of S1401 to S1410, S1412, and S1414 in the fourth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1410, S1412, and S1414 in the first embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the process of S1401, when the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received (S1401: Yes), the processes of S1402 to S1404 are executed, and then the process of S1520 is executed. In the process of S1520, the blinking display of the fourth symbol LED900 is set. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the lighting of the fourth symbol LED 900 based on the timing at which the main control device 110 starts the fluctuation display (lighting control) of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 37. You can start.

With reference to FIG. 68 (a), a missed confirmation command reception process (S1480), which is one process of the command determination process (FIG. 67, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. To do. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing this deviation confirmation command reception process (S1480). In the error confirmation command reception process (FIGS. 68 (a), S1480), a collation process is executed to see if the correctness judgment result indicated by the received variation pattern command and the correctness determination result indicated by the received error confirmation command are the same. , If they do not match, error handling is executed.

In the deviation confirmation command reception process (FIG. 68 (a), S1480), first, it is determined whether or not data indicating deviation is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1481). When data different from the deviation is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1481: No), as a result of collating the deviation confirmation command, a communication error occurs between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. A display error notification 1 command for displaying an error code (Z01H in this embodiment) indicating that the occurrence has been confirmed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1482). After that, the process of S1483 is executed. On the other hand, when the data indicating the deviation is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1481: Yes), the processing of S1482 is skipped and the processing of S1483 is executed. In the process of S1483, a display loss confirmation command instructing the display control device 114 to confirm and stop the third symbol is set (S1483).

Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1490), which is one of the command determination processes (FIG. 67, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. ) Will be explained. FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing the jackpot confirmation command reception process (S1490). In the jackpot confirmation command reception process (FIG. 68 (b), S1490), a collation process is executed to see if the hit / fail judgment result indicated by the received variation pattern command and the jackpot hit / fail judgment result indicated by the received jackpot confirmation command are the same. , If they do not match, error handling is executed.

In the jackpot confirmation command reception process (FIG. 68 (b), S1490), first, it is determined whether data indicating a jackpot is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1491). When data different from the jackpot is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1491: No), as a result of collating the jackpot confirmation command, a communication error occurs between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. A display error notification 1 command for displaying an error code (Z01A in this embodiment) indicating that the occurrence has been confirmed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1492). After that, the process of S1493 is executed. On the other hand, when the data indicating the jackpot is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1491: Yes), the processing of S1492 is skipped and the processing of S1493 is executed. In the process of S1493, a display jackpot confirmation command instructing the display control device 114 to confirm and stop the third symbol is set (S1493).

In this way, the main control device 110 is checked to see if the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d and the hit / fail determination result of the error confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command received from the main control device 110 match based on the fluctuation pattern. It is possible to detect that a communication error has occurred between the voice lamp control device 113 and the voice lamp control device 113. Then, by displaying the result on the third symbol display device 81 with an error code, it is possible to accurately notify the game store of the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10. Based on this error code, the game store side can confirm that there is no abnormality in the harness or the like connecting the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the game store can easily find the cause of the problem. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether the error code is when the missed confirmation command is received or when the jackpot confirmation command is received, even if the jackpot is notified by the third symbol or the like, the jackpot game is played. Even if a problem that has not been started occurs, the content of the problem can be accurately explained to the player based on the error code. Therefore, it is possible to reduce making the player feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 66, the description will be continued. When the command determination process (FIG. 67, S1311) is completed, the display command determination process (FIG. 69, S1330) is executed. In this display command determination process (FIG. 69, S1330), the voice lamp control is performed in the process of S2253 of the display loss confirmation command reception process (FIG. 72 (a), S2250) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, which will be described later. Display for notifying the device 113 that the hit / fail determination result is the confirmation stop display of the missing third symbol (that is, it is the timing to display the confirmation stop of the fourth symbol). In the process of S2263 of the jackpot confirmation command reception process (FIGS. 72 (b) and S2260), the hit / fail determination result indicates that the third symbol of the jackpot has been confirmed and stopped (that is, it is the timing to display the fourth symbol as confirmed stop). ) Is received, a process of collating the hit / fail judgment result indicated by the command with the hit / fail judgment result based on the fluctuation pattern stored in the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. , If they do not match, error handling is executed. In addition, the determination stop processing of the fourth symbol is also executed.

The display command determination process (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display command determination process (S1330).

In the display command determination process (FIG. 69, S1330), first, it is determined whether or not the display transmission loss fourth confirmation command has been received (S1331). When the display transmission loss 4th confirmation command is received (S1331), the display transmission loss 4th confirmation command reception process is executed (S1340).

With reference to FIG. 70A, a display transmission loss fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 69, S1330), which is one process of the display command determination process (FIG. 69, S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S1340) will be described. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the display transmission loss fourth confirmation command reception process (S1340).

In the display transmission disengagement fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 70A, S1340), first, it is determined whether or not data indicating whether or not the deviation is correct is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1341). When data different from the error is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1341: No), as a result of collating the display transmission error 4th confirmation command, between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. , A display error notification 3 command for displaying an error code (Z02H in this embodiment) indicating that the occurrence of a communication error has been confirmed on the third symbol display device is set (S1342). After that, the process of S1343 is executed. On the other hand, when the data indicating the deviation is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1341: Yes), the process of S1342 is skipped and the process of S1343 is executed. In the process of S1343, the process of setting the fourth symbol LED 900 to be turned off is executed (S1343).

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S1331, if the display transmission is lost and the fourth confirmation command is not received from the display control device 114 (S1331), the process of S1333 is executed. In the process of S1333, it is determined whether or not the display transmission jackpot fourth confirmation command is received from the display control device 114 (S1333). If the display transmission jackpot fourth confirmation command has not been received from the display control device 114 (S1333: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the display transmission jackpot 4th confirmation command is received from the display control device 114 (S1333: Yes), the display transmission jackpot 4th confirmation command reception process is executed (S1350).

With reference to FIG. 70 (b), the display transmission jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 69, S1330), which is one process of the display command determination process (FIG. 69, S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S1350) will be described. FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the display transmission jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (S1350).

In the display transmission jackpot fourth confirmation command reception process (FIG. 70 (b), S1350), first, it is determined whether data indicating the jackpot hit / fail determination is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1351). When data different from the jackpot is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1351: No), as a result of collating the display transmission jackpot 4th confirmation command, between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. , A display error notification 3 command for displaying an error code (Z02A in this embodiment) indicating that the occurrence of a communication error has been confirmed on the third symbol display device is set (S1352). After that, the process of S1353 is executed. On the other hand, when the data indicating the jackpot is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage area 233d (S1351: Yes), the processing of S1352 is skipped and the processing of S1353 is executed. In the process of S1353, the process of setting the fourth symbol LED 900 to be turned off is executed (S1353).

In this way, by collating the hit / fail judgment result indicated by the command received from the display control device 114 with the hit / fail judgment result based on the fluctuation pattern stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control It is possible to determine whether the communication control with the device 114 is normal. When there is an abnormality, an error code capable of recognizing the communication is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the game store side can easily recognize the abnormal portion. Therefore, when an error code indicating that a communication error is displayed is displayed between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, a harness for connecting the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Etc. can be investigated, and the abnormal portion of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily found. Further, since this error code is configured to be able to identify whether the display transmission is out of display 4th confirmation command or the display transmission jackpot 4th confirmation command, the jackpot game is not started even if the jackpot is notified by the 3rd symbol. Even when a problem such as the above occurs, the game store can accurately explain to the player what kind of problem has occurred based on this error code. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, in the fourth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 71, S2102), which is one of the V interrupt processes (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. ) Will be explained. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (FIG. 71, S2102) in the fourth embodiment. The command determination process (FIG. 71, S2102) of the fourth embodiment is different from the variation pattern command process (FIG. 32, S2102) of the first embodiment in S2221, S2250, S2260, S2270, S2280, S2290, and S2320. Each process has been added. As for other processes, the same processes as the command determination process (FIG. 32, S2102) in the first embodiment are executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

After the process of S2205 is executed, the process of S2221 is executed. In the process of S2221, the data of the hit / fail determination result indicated by the received display variation pattern command is stored in the display variation pattern storage area 233m. Of course, the received display variation pattern command may be stored as it is.

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the display loss confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2208). When the display loss confirmation command is received (2208: Yes), the process of S2209 is executed, and the process of S2250 is executed. In the process of S2250, the display loss confirmation command reception process is executed (S2260).

With reference to FIG. 72 (a), the display loss confirmation command reception process (S2250), which is one of the command determination processes (FIG. 71, S2102) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment. explain. FIG. 72 (a) is a flowchart showing the display loss confirmation command reception process (S2250).

In the display deviation confirmation command reception process (FIG. 72 (a), S2250), first, it is determined whether data indicating deviation is stored in the display variation pattern storage area 233 m (S2251). When data different from the deviation is stored in the display variation pattern storage area 233m (S2251: No), as a result of collating the display deviation confirmation command, between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Set the process of displaying the error code (Z03H in this embodiment) indicating that the occurrence of the communication error has been confirmed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2252). After that, the process of S2253 is executed. On the other hand, when the data indicating the deviation is stored in the display variation pattern storage area 233 m (S2251: Yes), the process of S2252 is skipped and the process of S2253 is executed. In the process of S2253, the display transmission off fourth confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the third symbol of the deviation has been confirmed and stopped displayed (that is, it is the timing to display the fourth symbol as the confirmation stop). Is set (S2253).

Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. In the process of S2210, when the display jackpot confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2210: Yes), the process of S2211 is executed, and then the process of S2260 is executed. In the process of S2260, the display jackpot confirmation command reception process is executed.

With reference to FIG. 72 (b), the display jackpot confirmation command reception process (S2260), which is one of the command determination processes (FIG. 71, S2102) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment. explain. FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing the display jackpot confirmation command reception process (S2260).

In the display jackpot confirmation command reception process (FIG. 72 (b), S2260), first, it is determined whether data indicating a jackpot is stored in the display variation pattern storage area 233 m (S2661). When data different from the jackpot is stored in the display variation pattern storage area 233 m (S2661: No), as a result of collating the display jackpot confirmation command, between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Set the process of displaying the error code (Z03A in this embodiment) indicating that the occurrence of the communication error has been confirmed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2262). After that, the process of S2263 is executed. On the other hand, when the data indicating the jackpot is stored in the display variation pattern storage area 233 m (S2661: Yes), the process of S2262 is skipped and the process of S2263 is executed. In the process of S2263, the display transmission jackpot 4th confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the third symbol of the jackpot has been confirmed and stopped (that is, it is the timing to display the fourth symbol as the confirmation stop). Is set (S2663).

In this way, the hit / fail judgment result indicated by the confirmation command received by the display control device 114 from the voice lamp control device 113 is collated with the data of the hit / fail judgment result based on the received display variation pattern command stored in the display control device 114. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine the communication error between the display control device 114 and the voice lamp control device 113. Further, since the error code displayed when the voice lamp control device 113 determines the received command and the case where the display control device 114 determines the received command is changed, the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 can be detected more accurately. Can be identified. Specifically, when it is determined that the matching does not match when both the display control device 114 and the voice lamp control device 113 receive the signals, the error codes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, respectively. The amusement shop side can suspect an abnormality such as a harness. On the other hand, if it is determined that the collations do not match only when either one is received, it is possible to suspect an abnormality in either control device itself. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately find and deal with the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. If the display jackpot confirmation command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether the display error notification 1 command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2270). When the display error notification 1 command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2270: Yes), the display error notification 1 command process is executed (S2280). As shown in FIG. 73A, the display error notification 1 command process (S2280) collates the loss confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command, and as a result, a communication error occurs between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. The error notification 1 for displaying the error code (Z01H or Z01A in the present embodiment) indicating that the occurrence of the above is confirmed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2281).

Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. In the process of S2270, if the display error notification 1 command is not received (S2270: No), it is determined whether the display error notification 3 command is received (S2290). When the display error notification 3 command is received (S2290: Yes), the display error notification 3 command process is executed (S2320). As shown in FIG. 73B, the display error notification 3 command reception process (S2320) displays as the voice lamp control device 113 as a result of collating the display transmission off fourth confirmation command or the display transmission jackpot fourth confirmation command. An error notification 3 is set to display an error code (Z02H or Z02A in this embodiment) indicating that the occurrence of a communication error has been confirmed with the control device 114 on the third symbol display device (S2321).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the display transmission off fourth confirmation command or display notifying the voice lamp control device 113 based on the display control device 114 confirming and stopping the third symbol. Since the transmission jackpot fourth confirmation command is transmitted, the voice lamp control device 113 can display the confirmation stop of the fourth symbol at the timing of the confirmation stop display of the third symbol.

Here, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the confirmation stop display of the fourth symbol and displays the display control device 114 for the confirmation stop display of the third symbol. When the confirmation command is set to display the third symbol and the fourth symbol as a confirmation stop, the display control device cannot display the third symbol as a confirmation stop due to a communication error or the like. In addition, the fourth symbol is displayed as a fixed stop. However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment, it is confirmed that the display control device 114 has fixedly stopped and displayed the third symbol, and the voice lamp control device 113 displays the fixed stop of the fourth symbol. Therefore, only the fourth symbol is displayed. It is possible to prevent the problem of displaying the fixed stop first.

Further, as already described in the first embodiment, in the third symbol, after the shaking fluctuation is executed, the display of the shaking center is repeated for 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation time, and the third symbol is displayed at the end of the fluctuation time. Based on the command to display the fixed stop, the stop is displayed in the same fixed stop display mode as the shaking center, so when the fixed stop is displayed, the third symbol changes momentarily before the fixed stop display and after the fixed stop display. It is possible to prevent the display as if it were displayed. Further, since the fourth symbol has such a configuration and the fourth symbol is fixedly stopped in synchronization with the fixed stop timing, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be fixedly stopped in synchronization without any discomfort.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol, the third symbol is displayed at the shaking center at the timing when the shaking fluctuation of one cycle is completed for 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation time. Stop display and switch to the final display mode of the 3rd symbol at the same shaking center as the 3rd symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the display deviation confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command received at the end of the fluctuation time. The case of displaying is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol whose display control device 114 controls the fluctuation display, the fluctuation fluctuation is continuously executed until the fluctuation time ends. Then, the confirmation stop display of the third symbol is executed based on the display confirmation command output by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the confirmation command of the third symbol output by the main control device 110. At this time, if the third symbol that is swaying and fluctuating is not the display mode of the sway center, the display control device 114 executes the delay of the fluctuation stop processing of the third symbol until the display mode of the sway center is reached. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured as described above.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing an example of the variation display corresponding to the deviation variation pattern of the third symbol in the fifth embodiment. The timing chart (FIG. 7) of the third symbol in the first embodiment is changed in that the shaking fluctuation is set to be repeated until the end of the fluctuation time. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the fluctuations of the third symbol are temporarily stopped and swayed, the swaying fluctuations as shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (i) are repeatedly executed. As will be described later, in the fluctuation display data table set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern of the third symbol in the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the fluctuation fluctuation is set to be the same, and the length of the fluctuation time is set. The time for starting the shaking fluctuation and the number of times the shaking fluctuation is executed differ depending on the difference.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display data table stored in the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment. The data structure of the fluctuation fluctuation is changed with respect to the fluctuation display data table (see FIG. 12) in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fluctuation display data table shown in FIG. 75, the fluctuation time corresponds to the fluctuation pattern up to the address 02EFH, and at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, the display of the shaking center is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is set to. Normally, at this timing, a display loss confirmation command or a display jackpot confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the display mode is switched to the same confirmation stop display mode as that of the shaking center, and the confirmation stop display is displayed. To. Therefore, by switching the third symbol to a different display mode when the determination of the third symbol is stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the third symbol as if it fluctuates momentarily. It is possible to show the player that the symbol is stopped at the same timing for each fluctuation, and it is possible to inform the player that the third symbol has been confirmed and stopped in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the appearance of the third symbol at the time of fixed stop can be stopped neatly.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a transfer data table in the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment. This is a transfer data table corresponding to the variable display data table shown in FIG. 75.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, in the fifth embodiment, the display setting process (FIG. 77, S2103), which is one of the V interrupt processes (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. ) Will be explained. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (FIG. 77, S2103) in the fifth embodiment. In the display setting process (FIG. 77, S2103) of the fifth embodiment, the process of S3030 is added to the display setting process (FIG. 77, S2103) of the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those of the display setting process (FIG. 32, S2102) in the first embodiment are executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

In the process of S3010, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3010: No), the process of S3030 is executed. In the process of S3030, it is determined whether the address of the pointer of the fluctuation display data table is the drawing content (display content) of the fluctuation fluctuation (S3030). In the case of the variable display data table of FIG. 75, it is determined whether the address corresponds to any of 02E7H, 02EBH, and 02EFH. In this way, the address determined for each selected variable display data table is different.

When the pointer is an address indicating the drawing content of the shaking fluctuation (S3030: Yes), the process of confirming and stopping and displaying the third symbol after S3011 is sequentially executed. On the other hand, if the pointer is not an address indicating the drawing content of the fluctuation fluctuation (S3030: No), this process is terminated. Then, the determination is made again in the process of the display setting process (FIG. 77, S2103) executed at the timing when the next V interrupt process (FIG. 31 (b)) is executed. Then, when the address indicates the drawing content of the shaking fluctuation, the process of confirming the stop display of the third symbol is executed. That is, if the timing at which the third symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed is not the shaking center, it is delayed until the next shaking center is displayed.

With this configuration, when the third symbol is shaken and fluctuated, the third symbol can be fixedly stopped and displayed when the shaking center is displayed. Since the third symbol displayed as the fixed stop is the display mode of the shaking center, the player feels a sense of discomfort that the third symbol displayed at a different position momentarily changes when the fixed stop display of the third symbol is displayed. It can suppress giving. In addition, the shaking fluctuation can be continued during the fluctuation display time, and the third symbol can be displayed in fluctuation in synchronization with the first symbol. In addition, the time of the fluctuation time is different between the main control device 110 and the display control device 114, or the display control processing is lost in the display control device 114, so that the fluctuation time is displayed in the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display data table. Even if the missed confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command for display cannot be received, the confirmation process of the third symbol is executed when the shaking center is displayed with a delay until the display is displayed at the shaking center. The third symbol can be displayed as a fixed stop without any discomfort.

In the present embodiment, when the third symbol is fixedly stopped, if the display mode is different from that of the shaking center, the fixed stop is delayed until it is displayed at the shaking center. Among the shaking fluctuations, a range of a display mode similar to the display mode of the shaking center is set in advance, and if the fluctuation display mode is not in that range, it is configured to delay until the fluctuation display mode in that range is reached. You may. With such a configuration, the delay time can be shortened, and the game can be controlled efficiently. In addition, the fixed stop timings of the first symbol and the third symbol can be brought closer to each other.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 86. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol, the third symbol is displayed at the shaking center at the timing when the shaking fluctuation of one cycle is completed for 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation time. Stop display and switch to the final display mode of the 3rd symbol at the same shaking center as the 3rd symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the display deviation confirmation command or the display jackpot confirmation command received at the end of the fluctuation time. The case of displaying is described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, even if the voice lamp control device 113 receives a confirmation command instructing the main control device 110 to confirm and stop the third symbol, the display control device 114 informs the pachinko machine 10. Until the command indicating that the display corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time is received is received, the process of delaying the output of the confirmation command of the third symbol to the display control device 114 is executed for a certain period of time. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured as described above.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to communicate with each other with respect to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 8) in the first embodiment. A symbol confirmation flag 223f and a symbol confirmation timer 223g are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113, respectively.

The symbol confirmation flag 223f is a flag indicating that an out-of-order confirmation command or a jackpot confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110. In the process of S1461 of the command determination process (FIG. 82, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the command is set to ON based on the reception of the loss confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command. On the other hand, in the symbol confirmation process (FIG. 81, S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, it is set to off when the display confirmation command is set. When the power is turned on, it is set to off, which is the initial value.

The symbol confirmation timer 223g is a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the main control device 110 and receives the confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command. In the process of S1461 of the command determination process (FIGS. 82 and S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the symbol confirmation timer 223g receives the disconnection confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command from the main control device 110. Based on this, 200 is set. Further, it is subtracted by 1 in the process of S1363 of the symbol determination process (FIG. 81, S1360), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 80, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Since the symbol confirmation process (FIG. 81, S1360) is executed at 1 ms intervals, the symbol confirmation timer 223 g is a timer that clocks 200 ms. When the symbol confirmation timer 223g is subtracted until it becomes 0, in the process of S1365 of the symbol confirmation process (FIG. 81, S1360), the display control device 114 is instructed to display the confirmation stop of the third symbol. Set the confirmation command. Further, when the power is turned on, the symbol confirmation timer 233 g is set to 0, which is an initial value.

FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the sixth embodiment. In the configuration of the sixth embodiment, the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 with respect to the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 (see FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is a flag indicating that a display transmission confirmation command indicating that the display content corresponding to the fluctuation end time is displayed has been transmitted (set) to the voice lamp control device 113. The effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is set to on when the time counter 233h is 1 and this flag is off in the process of S3221 of the pointer update process (FIG. 86, S3005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. .. Further, it is set to off in the process of S2330 of the command determination process (FIG. 84, S2102) or the process of S3040 of the display setting process (FIG. 85, S2103) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the main process (S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1300). In the main process (FIG. 80, S1300) of the sixth embodiment, the content of the command determination process (S1311) is changed from the main process (FIG. 25, S1300) of the first embodiment, and the processes of S1360 and S1370 are changed. Has been added. The processes of S1301 to S1310, S1312, and S1315 to S1319 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1310, S1312, and S1315 to S1319 in the first embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 81, a symbol determination process (FIG. 81, S1360), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 80, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this symbol determination process (S1360).

In the symbol confirmation process (FIG. 81, S1360), first, it is determined whether the symbol confirmation flag 223f is on (S1361). When the symbol confirmation flag 223f is on (S1361: Yes), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation timer 223g is 0 (S1362). If the symbol confirmation timer 223g is not 0 (S1362: No), the value of the symbol confirmation timer 223g is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation timer 223g is 0 (S1362: No), the symbol confirmation flag 223f is set to off (S1364). After that, the display confirmation command is set (S1365). If the symbol confirmation flag 223f is on (S1361: Yes), this process ends.

In this way, based on the value of the symbol timer 223g being 0, that is, 200 ms have passed since the confirmation command was received from the main control device 110, the display control device 114 is displayed with the confirmation stop of the third symbol. Set a confirmation command for display to instruct that. Therefore, even if the display control device 114 fails to process the display control and the display set in the variable display data table is not displayed until the display corresponding to the end of the variable time, the deviation is within 200 ms. If so, the correction can be made.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a command determination process (S1311), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 25, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). In the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1311) of the sixth embodiment, the processes of S141 to S1413 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 26, S1311) of the first embodiment, and each process of S1460 to S1461 is changed. Has been added. The processes of S1401 to S1409 and S1414 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1409 and S1414 in the first embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the process of S1408, if the hold ball number command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1408), the process of S1460 is executed. In the process of S1460, it is determined whether or not the disconnection confirmation command or the jackpot confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1460). When the missed or jackpot confirmation command is received (S1460: Yes), the symbol confirmation flag 223f is set to ON, and the symbol confirmation timer 223g 200 is set (S1461).

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the display command determination process (S1370), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 25, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described in the sixth embodiment. .. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this display command determination process (S1370).

In the display command determination process (FIG. 83, S1370), first, it is determined whether or not a display transmission confirmation command indicating that the display mode corresponding to the variation end time of the variation display data table has been displayed from the display control device 114 (FIG. 83, S1370). S1371). When the display transmission confirmation command is received (S1371: Yes), the symbol confirmation timer 223g is reset to the initial value 0 (S1372). On the other hand, if the display transmission confirmation command has not been received (S1371: No), this process ends.

In this way, when the display transmission confirmation command is received from the display control device 114, the value of the symbol confirmation timer 223g is forcibly reset. As a result, in the processing of the symbol confirmation processing (FIG. 81, S1360), the display confirmation command is set, and the processing of the confirmation stop display of the third symbol is executed. Therefore, even if a problem such as a display control processing failure occurs in the display control device 114, the third symbol can be determined immediately after waiting until the end of the fluctuation within the range of 200 ms. .. Further, in the first embodiment, a process of stopping and displaying the sway fluctuation in the display mode of the sway center is executed for 200 ms until the end of the fluctuation, but in the present embodiment, even if such a process is not performed, the sway fluctuation is stopped and displayed. If the deviation is within 200 ms, it is possible to switch to the fixed stop display mode at the timing when the display mode of the shaking center is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort as if the symbol fluctuates momentarily at the timing of executing the fixed stop display from the shaking fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, in the sixth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 84, S2102), which is one of the V interrupt processes (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. ) Will be explained. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (FIG. 84, S2102) in the sixth embodiment. In the command determination process (FIG. 84, S2102) of the sixth embodiment, each process of S2208 to S2211 is deleted from the variation pattern command process (FIG. 32, S2102) of the first embodiment, respectively, and S2340 to S2341 Each process has been added individually. As for other processes, the same processes as the command determination process (FIG. 32, S2102) in the first embodiment are executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

In the process of S2206, when the display stop type command is not received (S2206), it is determined whether or not the display confirmation command is received (S2340). When the display confirmation command is received (S2340: Yes), the value of the time counter 233h is set to 0 (S2341).

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, in the sixth embodiment, the display setting process (FIG. 85, S2103), which is one of the V interrupt processes (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. ) Will be explained. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (FIG. 85, S2103) in the sixth embodiment. In the display setting process (FIG. 86, S2103) of the sixth embodiment, the process of S3040 is added to the display setting process (FIG. 35, S2103) of the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those of the display setting process (FIG. 35, S2102) in the first embodiment are executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted. In the process of S3040, the process of setting the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k to off is executed based on the process of the confirmation display of the third symbol being set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, in the sixth embodiment, the display setting processing process (FIG. 86, which is one of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114). The pointer update process (S3005), which is one process of S2103), will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (FIG. 86, S3005) in the sixth embodiment. In the pointer update process (FIG. 86, S3005) of the sixth embodiment, the processes of S3220 and S3221 are added to the pointer update process (FIG. 37, S3005) of the first embodiment, respectively. For other processes, the same process as the pointer update process (FIG. 37, S3005) in the first embodiment is executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

In the process of S3202, when the data is not End information (S3202: No) or in the process of S3205, the process of S3220 is executed after the process of initializing the pointer is executed. In the process of S3220, it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h is 1 and the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is off (S3220). When the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 1 and the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is off (S3220: Yes), the voice lamp control indicates that the display content corresponding to the fluctuation end time of the fluctuation display data table is displayed. A display transmission confirmation command for notifying the device 113 is set, and the effect symbol confirmation flag 233k is set to off (S3221).

In addition, each configuration described in the first to sixth embodiments may be combined and configured.

Further, among the first to sixth embodiments, the fourth symbol is set in the same manner as the other embodiments for the embodiment in which the fourth symbol is not set, and is synchronized with the third symbol (first symbol). It may be configured to be variable (substantially synchronized) and displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the shaking fluctuations described in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to the shaking of the symbol shown above. Specifically, the size (scale) of the third symbol may be displayed by changing the size in a predetermined cycle, may be configured to be rotated and displayed in a predetermined cycle, or may be displayed in a predetermined cycle. It may be configured to be rotated by a predetermined angle for display.

Further, the display mode for notifying the temporary stop may be configured not only to display the shaking fluctuation as described above, but also to display the third symbol itself as a stop and to display the pattern of the third symbol and the brightness and darkness in a variable manner. Specifically, the third symbol may be stopped and displayed, and the pattern or character attached to the third symbol or the third symbol may be displayed in a predetermined variation mode. Further, the light and darkness of the third symbol may be repeatedly switched and displayed. In addition, it can be set in a dedicated display mode for notifying that the vehicle is temporarily stopped.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration described in the first to sixth embodiments. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fixed stop command for fixedly stopping the third symbol from the main control device 110, and the display control device 114 receives the fixed stop command. When the display confirmation stop display command is output, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 determines the display mode of the shaking fluctuation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the determined timing. The third symbol may be configured to be fixedly stopped and displayed by switching in a display mode that is the same as or similar to the displayed third symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that gives the player a sense of incongruity that the third symbol is momentarily dynamically displayed when the determination of the third symbol is stopped.

Further, the fourth symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described above overlaps the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and when a driving device that operates well is arranged, the operation of the driving device is performed. By moving and displaying the fourth symbol in accordance with the above, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fourth symbol is concealed by the driving device and is difficult to see. As a result, the player can easily identify that the special symbol is in the lottery game (during fluctuation).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 and the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 displays and controls the command. The command to be transmitted to the device 114 is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 confirms the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is the transfer data that is not the Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. Thereby, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer processing can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case of storing the memory is not necessarily limited to this, and a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. are provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and MPU231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (one input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained during power-on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to (data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is supplied. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are input from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 from the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. You may transfer directly to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. The case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is transferred. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be used as the main control device 110. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 35). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 43) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the flow of the ball being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball into the ball entry port. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is set to 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing contents and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect can be described, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common for each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), a V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. Can be kept accurate without timing the time interval by sending.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

In the above embodiment, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo production is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demo command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the rear image and stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be used for operation checks at players, hall personnel, factories, etc. at the time of manufacturing. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image (drawing content) to be drawn at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the image data information (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn, which is defined at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and refers to the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction for transferring image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed in the above from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp controller 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, in the back surface C which is the back image of the “island stage”, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. Further, as the back image, not only the one that scrolls or the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a back image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with the third symbol display device 81. Is provided with another fourth symbol display device, and even if the continuous advance notice effect is executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates in response to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner in combination with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. However, the sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 causes the continuous advance notice effect, so that the player is given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first entry slot 64, which starts a lottery for a special symbol jackpot when a ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13, but is not necessarily limited to this. There may be a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances arranged in the game board 13 in which the entry is detected independently and the lottery for the jackpot is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first ball entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold ball counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, the hold ball number command is mainly controlled every time the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a continuous warning flag or an error occurs instead of a command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114. Various flags such as flags are generated, and based on the flags, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as warning images are generated. Alternatively, a transfer instruction for necessary image data may be set.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination of a game based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a display means capable of displaying identification information capable of identifying the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and the identification displayed on the display means. The dynamic display in a gaming machine having a display control means for dynamically displaying information in a dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time is set and then displaying the information in a fixed stop display mode indicating the result of the hit / fail determination. The modes are a first temporary stop display period for displaying the identification information in a temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating a regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals, and a predetermined period up to the set time. , A temporary stop period having at least a second temporary stop display period for displaying the identification information in a second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode is set. The gaming machine A1 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine A1, identification information that can identify the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means that executes the winning / failing determination of the game is displayed by the display means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. After the identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time is set, the display control means displays the confirmed stop display mode showing the result of the hit / fail determination. The dynamic display mode is a predetermined period up to the first temporary stop display period and the set time for displaying the identification information in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating the regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. A temporary stop period is set that has at least a second temporary stop display period in which the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode. There is. As a result, when the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode is significantly changed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort in the game.

The gaming machine A1 has a time management means for instructing the display control means to display the identification information in the definite display mode based on the elapse of the set time, and the display control means has the time. While the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode based on the instruction of the management means, if there is no instruction by the time management means even after the set time has elapsed, the identification information is used as the first provisional information. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it is displayed in a stop display mode or a second temporary stop display mode.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the time management means instructs the display control means to display the identification information in the definite display mode based on the elapse of the set time. Based on the instruction of the time management means, the identification information is displayed by the display control means in the fixed stop display mode. On the other hand, if there is no instruction from the time management means even after the set time has elapsed, the identification information is displayed by the display control means in the first temporary stop display mode or the second temporary stop display mode. As a result, even when the identification information is not displayed in the fixed stop display mode even after the set time has elapsed, it is possible to indicate to the player that the player is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that confuses the player.

It has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a subordinate control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means determines the success or failure of the game. The hit / fail determination means to be executed, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the pass / fail judgment result of the hit / fail determination means is set, and the above-mentioned The slave control means has a stop display means for notifying the slave control means of the stop timing of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means, and the slave control means is a dynamic display mode of the main control means. Based on the dynamic display mode determined by the determination means, the identification information is preliminarily displayed based on the notification from the display control means for displaying the dynamic display mode on the display means and the stop display means of the main control means. It has a definite stop means for displaying a stop in a predetermined definite stop display mode, and the dynamic display mode temporarily stops the identification information by repeating a regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. The first temporary stop display period to be displayed in the first temporary stop display mode and the predetermined period including the set time, the second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that it has at least a temporary stop period having a second temporary stop display period for displaying identification information.

According to the gaming machine A3, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the subordinate control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result of the hit / fail determination means is set. The stop display means notifies the slave control means of the stop timing of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. The slave control means causes the display means to display the dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means. Based on the notification from the stop display means of the main control means, the identification information is stopped and displayed by the fixed stop display mode in a predetermined fixed stop display mode. The dynamic display mode includes a first temporary stop display period and a set time for displaying the identification information in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating the regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. A temporary stop period is set that has at least a predetermined period and a second temporary stop display period for displaying identification information in a second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode. As a result, when the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode is significantly changed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort in the game.

Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the game, the display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information that can identify the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and the display means are displayed. In a gaming machine having a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information in a dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time is set and then displaying the identification information in a fixed stop display mode indicating a hit / fail determination result. In the dynamic display mode, the identification information is displayed in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating the regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals until the set time elapses. A temporary stop period is set that has at least a temporary stop period and a second temporary stop period displayed in a second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode after the lapse of the set time. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the display control means displays the identification information in the fixed stop display mode during the second temporary stop period.

According to the gaming machine B1, identification information that can identify the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means that executes the winning / failing determination of the game is dynamically displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. After the identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time is set, the identification information is displayed by the display control means in the fixed stop display mode showing the result of the hit / fail determination. In the dynamic display mode, the identification information is displayed in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating the regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals until the set time elapses. A temporary stop period is set that includes a period and a second temporary stop period displayed in a second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode after the lapse of the set time. The display control means displays the identification information in the fixed stop display mode during the second temporary stop period. As a result, when the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode is significantly changed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort in the game.

In the game machine B1, an auxiliary information display means capable of dynamically displaying auxiliary identification information configured in a display mode different from the identification information indicating that a lottery game for notifying the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is in progress. , Auxiliary information display control in which the auxiliary identification information is fixedly stopped in a predetermined auxiliary fixed stop display mode after the dynamic display is continued until the display control means displays the identification information in the fixed stop display mode. A gaming machine B2, characterized in that it has means and means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the auxiliary identification information configured in a display mode different from the identification information indicating that the lottery game for notifying the hit / fail determination result by the hit / miss determination means is in progress is dynamically displayed on the auxiliary information display means. After the dynamic display is continued until the display control means displays the identification information in the fixed stop display mode, the auxiliary identification information is fixedly displayed by the auxiliary information display control means in the predetermined auxiliary fixed stop display mode. As a result, even when the identification information is temporarily stopped, the auxiliary identification information is dynamically displayed, so that it can be easily understood that the identification information is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the game machine B1 or B2, a temporary stop transition means for shifting from the first temporary stop period to the second temporary stop period based on the elapse of the set time, and a predetermined time after the set time elapses. The display control means and the auxiliary information display control means each have a time management means for notifying the passage of the predetermined time based on the passage of time, and the display control means is provided by the time management means. The identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode based on the notification of the above, and the auxiliary information display control means displays the auxiliary identification information in the auxiliary fixed stop display mode based on the notification from the time management means. A game machine B3 characterized in that it is displayed in a display mode.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the elapse of the set time, the temporary stop transition means shifts from the first temporary stop period to the second temporary stop period. Based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the set time elapses, the time management means notifies the display control means and the auxiliary information display control means of the elapse of the predetermined period, respectively. Based on the notification from the time management means, the identification information is displayed by the display control means in the fixed stop display mode. Based on the notification from the time management means, the auxiliary identification information is displayed by the auxiliary information display means in the auxiliary confirmation stop display mode. As a result, the fixed stop timing of the identification information and the auxiliary identification information can be twisted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort due to a shift in the fixed stop timing.

The main control means for executing the control of the game, the sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the main control means are the success or failure of the game based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The pass / fail determination means for executing the determination, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result by the pass / fail determination means, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the elapse of the set time set in the aspect, the slave control means has a time management means for notifying the slave control means that the set time has elapsed, and the slave control means said. Dynamic display mode of the main control means The display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means in the dynamic display mode determined by the determination means, and the time management means of the main control means notify the set time. Based on the above, the definite stop means for displaying the identification information in a predetermined definite stop display mode, and the identification information indicating that the lottery game for notifying the hit / fail determination result by the hit / miss determination means is in progress. In a gaming machine having an auxiliary information display control means for dynamically displaying auxiliary identification information configured in different display modes on the auxiliary information display means, the dynamic display mode displays the identification information at regular intervals. The first temporary stop display period for displaying in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the temporary stop is repeated by repeating the regular dynamic display mode and the predetermined period including the set time, than the first temporary stop display mode. A temporary stop period having at least a second temporary stop display period for displaying the identification information in the second temporary stop display mode similar to the fixed stop display mode is set, and the display control means is said by the fixed stop means. Based on the fact that the identification information has been fixedly stopped, the auxiliary information display control means is notified that the identification information has been fixedly stopped by the fixed stop means, and the auxiliary information display control means has said the display. A gaming machine characterized in that the auxiliary identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined auxiliary information fixed stop display mode based on the notification that the identification information has been fixedly stopped by the control means. C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, the control of the gaming is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the subordinate control means based on the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the dynamic display mode determining mode of the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means that executes the winning / failing determination of the game is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the elapse of the set time set in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the time management means notifies the slave control means that the set time has elapsed. To. On the other hand, in the slave control means, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means. Based on the notification of the set time from the time management means of the main control means, the identification information is stopped and displayed by the fixed stop means in a predetermined fixed stop display mode. Auxiliary identification information configured in a display mode different from the identification information indicating that the lottery game for notifying the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / miss determination means is being performed is dynamically displayed on the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary information display control means. The dynamic display mode includes a first temporary stop display period and a set time for displaying the identification information in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating the regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. A temporary stop period having at least a predetermined period and a second temporary stop display period for displaying the identification information in a second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode is set. .. Based on the fact that the identification information has been fixedly stopped by the fixed stop means, the display control means notifies the auxiliary information display control means that the identification information has been fixedly stopped by the fixed stop means. Based on the notification that the identification information has been fixedly stopped by the display control means, the auxiliary identification information is stopped and displayed by the auxiliary information display means in the predetermined auxiliary information fixed stop display mode. As a result, when the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode is significantly changed. Further, since the auxiliary identification information is fixedly stopped at the timing when the identification information is fixedly stopped, the fixed stop timing of the identification information and the auxiliary identification information can be twisted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort in the game.

In the gaming machine C1, the slave control means is a first slave control means that executes game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a game based on a slave control signal from the first slave control means. The first slave control means has the auxiliary information display control means, and the second slave control means has the display control means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, the control of the game is executed by the first slave control means based on the control signal from the main control means. The game is controlled by the second slave control means based on the slave control signal from the first slave control means. The first slave control means includes an auxiliary information display control means. Further, the second slave control means includes the display control means. Thereby, the control load of the first slave control means and the second slave control means can be reduced respectively. Therefore, by reducing the control load in the game, the control time required for the processing of the game can be shortened.

A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination of a game based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a display means capable of displaying identification information capable of identifying the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and the identification displayed on the display means A temporary stop period including the set time for displaying information in a temporary stop display mode indicating that a predetermined set time is set and the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating a regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. Based on the elapse of the set time in the gaming machine having the display control means for displaying the identification information indicating the hit / miss determination result after the dynamic display in the set dynamic display mode. , The time management means for notifying the display control means that the set time has elapsed, and the temporary stop display mode based on the notification from the time management means that the set time has elapsed. A definite stop means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a definite stop display mode similar to a specific display mode displayed at a predetermined timing, and when the time management means notifies the elapse of the set time, the identification information A device having a delay means for delaying the stop display by the fixed stop means until the identification information is displayed in the specific display mode when the temporary stop display mode is not a preset specific display mode. The game machine D1 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine D1, identification information that can identify the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means that executes the winning / failing determination of the game is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. A setting for displaying the identification information displayed on the display means in a temporary stop display mode indicating that a predetermined set time is set and the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating a regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. After the temporary stop period including the time is dynamically displayed in the set dynamic display mode, it is displayed by the display control means with the identification information indicating the hit / fail determination result. Based on the elapse of the set time, the time management means notifies the display control means that the set time has elapsed. Based on the notification from the time management means that the set time has elapsed, the fixed stop means makes a fixed stop in a fixed stop display mode that is similar to the specific display mode displayed at a predetermined timing of the temporary stop display mode. When the time management means notifies the elapse of the set time, if the temporary stop display mode of the identification information is not the preset specific display mode, the stop display by the fixed stop means is displayed in the specific display mode. It is delayed by the delay means until it is done. As a result, when the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode is significantly changed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort in the game.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the dynamic display mode is preset so as to be displayed in the specific stop display mode in response to the passage of the set time.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the dynamic display mode is preset so as to be displayed in the specific stop display mode corresponding to the passage of the set time, so that the set time is set. When the fixed stop is made at the elapsed timing, the identification information can be smoothly stopped in the fixed stop display mode, and the game processing can be efficiently executed.

The gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2, wherein the delay time delayed by the delay means is set in one cycle or less of the temporary stop display mode.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the delay time delayed by the delay means is set to one cycle or less of the temporary stop display mode, so that the delay time should be made shorter. Is possible, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the delay is larger than the set time.

A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination of a game based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a display means capable of displaying identification information capable of identifying the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and the identification displayed on the display means. A temporary stop period including the set time for displaying information in a temporary stop display mode indicating that a predetermined set time is set and the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating a regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. Is set to the dynamic display mode in the gaming machine having the display control means for displaying the result in the confirmed stop display mode indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment after the dynamic display mode is set. A display management means for notifying that the setting display mode corresponding to the set time has been displayed, and a time for notifying the display control means that the set time has elapsed based on the elapse of the set time. Displayed in the temporary stop display mode based on the notification from the management means and the time management means that the set time has elapsed and the notification that the set display mode has been displayed by the display management means. The gaming machine D4 is characterized by having a fixed stop means for displaying the identification information in the fixed stop display mode.

According to the gaming machine D4, identification information that can identify the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means that executes the winning / failing determination of the game is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The identification information displayed on the display means is displayed in a temporary stop display mode indicating that a predetermined set time is set and the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating a regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. After the temporary stop period including the set time is dynamically displayed in the set dynamic display mode, it is displayed by the display control means with the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result. The display management means notifies that the set display mode corresponding to the set time set in the dynamic display mode is displayed. Based on the elapse of the set time, the time management means notifies the display control means that the set time has elapsed. Based on the notification of the set time by the time management means and the notification that the set display mode is displayed by the display management means, the identification information displayed in the temporary stop display mode is confirmed in the fixed stop display mode. It is fixedly stopped by the stopping means. As a result, when the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode is significantly changed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort in the game.

In the gaming machine D4, the fixed stop means forcibly says the display management means when there is no notification from the display management means even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the time management means notifies the elapse of the set time. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the fixed stop display mode.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if there is no notification from the display management means even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the time management means notifies the elapse of the set time, the fixed stop means forcibly displays the identification information in the fixed stop display mode. The stop is displayed by the fixed stop means. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the identification information is not fixedly stopped even if the set time is greatly exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the identification information is not fixedly stopped and the player is confused.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, C1 to C2, and D1 to D5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, C1 to C2, and D1 to D5, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, B1 to B3, C1 to C2, and D1 to D5, the gaming machine Z3 is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine that fluctuates the left, middle, and right special symbols and notifies the result of a game win / fail judgment, after the special symbols are fluctuated, they are temporarily stopped until they are fixedly stopped. A gaming machine has been proposed that is configured to shake and fluctuate the design of the game so that the player has a strong sense of expectation that the fluctuation display will continue until just before the end of the fluctuation, and the expectation for the game will be maintained. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-153640).
In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the stopping mode at the end of the fluctuation causes variation in the display by swinging and fluctuating, which makes the player feel uncomfortable when the fluctuation is stopped.
The present technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that reduces giving a player a sense of discomfort in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has identification information capable of distinguishing between the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the game and the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. And the identification information displayed on the display means are dynamically displayed in a dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time is set, and then displayed in a fixed stop display mode showing the result of the hit / fail determination. The dynamic display mode is a first temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating a regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. A second temporary stop display that displays the identification information in a second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode for a predetermined period up to the first temporary stop display period and the set time. A temporary suspension period having at least a period is set.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 instructs the display control means to display the identification information in the definite display mode based on the elapse of the set time in the game machine described in the technical idea 1. The display control means has a time management means, and the display control means displays the identification information in the fixed stop display mode based on the instruction of the time management means, while the time management means is used even if the set time elapses. When there is no instruction, the identification information is displayed in the first temporary stop display mode or the second temporary stop display mode.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 has a main control means for executing the main control of the game and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means. The control means determines a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the game, and a dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means is set. The slave control means includes a dynamic display mode determining means and a stop display means for notifying the slave control means of the stop timing of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. Notification from the display control means for displaying the dynamic display mode on the display means and the stop display means of the main control means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means. Based on the above, the dynamic display mode includes a fixed stop means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a predetermined fixed stop display mode, and the dynamic display mode is a regular dynamic display mode for displaying the identification information at regular intervals. The first temporary stop display period for displaying in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the temporary stop is repeated and the predetermined period including the set time are closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode. A temporary stop period having at least a second temporary stop display period for displaying the identification information is set in the second temporary stop display mode.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the display means displays identification information capable of identifying the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / losing determination of the game. After the identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time is set, the display control means displays the confirmed stop display mode showing the result of the hit / fail determination.
The dynamic display mode is a predetermined period up to the first temporary stop display period and the set time for displaying the identification information in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating the regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. A temporary stop period is set that has at least a second temporary stop display period in which the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode. There is.
As a result, when the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode is significantly changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the time management means instructs the display control means to display the identification information in the definite display mode based on the elapse of the set time. Based on the instruction of the time management means, the identification information is displayed by the display control means in the fixed stop display mode. On the other hand, if there is no instruction from the time management means even after the set time has elapsed, the identification information is displayed by the display control means in the first temporary stop display mode or the second temporary stop display mode.
As a result, even when the identification information is not displayed in the fixed stop display mode even after the set time has elapsed, it is possible to indicate to the player that the player is temporarily stopped. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that confuses the player.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the subordinate control means based on the control signal from the main control means.
In the main control means, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means. The dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode in which a predetermined set time for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the pass / fail determination result of the hit / fail determination means is set. The stop display means notifies the slave control means of the stop timing of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means.
The slave control means causes the display means to display the dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means. Based on the notification from the stop display means of the main control means, the identification information is stopped and displayed by the fixed stop display mode in a predetermined fixed stop display mode. The dynamic display mode includes a first temporary stop display period and a set time for displaying the identification information in the first temporary stop display mode indicating that the identification information is temporarily stopped by repeating the regular dynamic display mode at regular intervals. A temporary stop period is set that has at least a predetermined period and a second temporary stop display period for displaying identification information in a second temporary stop display mode that is closer to the fixed stop display mode than the first temporary stop display mode.
As a result, when the identification information is displayed in the fixed stop display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode is significantly changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce giving the player a sense of discomfort in the game.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means , auxiliary display means )
110 Main controller (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control means ( first slave control means)
114 Display control device (display control means, auxiliary information display control means, second slave control means)
201 MPU ( discrimination means)
S209 ( progress notification means, stop display means)
S307, S309 (Dynamic display mode determining means)
S3011 (fixed stop means)

Claims (2)

The main control means that executes the control of the game,
A subordinate control means that executes game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and
The main control means
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions,
A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of identification information based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means,
It has a progress notification means for notifying the passage of a set period set in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means.
The slave control means
A display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means,
Based on the notification of the elapse of the set period by the progress notification means, the confirmation stop means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a predetermined confirmation display mode, and
In a gaming machine having an auxiliary information display control means for dynamically displaying auxiliary identification information in a display mode different from the identification information.
The subordinate control means has a stop notification means for notifying the auxiliary information display control means that the identification information has been stopped and displayed in the definite display mode by the definite stop means.
When the stop notification means notifies that the identification information has been stopped and displayed in the confirmation display mode, the auxiliary information display control means stops the auxiliary identification information in a predetermined auxiliary information confirmation display mode. To display
The identification information can be set to a period during which the player cannot see the identification information during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed.
Wherein the auxiliary identification information, gaming machine, characterized in that in which the period in which invisible from Yu skill who are prevented from being set. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means for displaying the identification information is composed of a liquid crystal display.

Images